You are on page 1of 705

Time

0705 - 0745 0745 - 0825 0825 - 0905 0905 - 0945 0945 - 1025 1045 - 1125 1125 - 1205 1205 - 1245 1245 - 1325 MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY SATURDAY JAN FEB MAC APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEPT OCT NOV 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 01 02 03

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 THEMES PEOPLE SOCIAL ISSUES HEALTH ENVIRONMENT SCIENCE & TECH. VALUES TOPIC: Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You Chapter 2 :Family Trees Chapter 3: Stand By Me Chapter 4: It All Starts At Home Chapter 5: Do You care Enough? Chapter 6: What A Wonderful World! Chapter 7: Safe Homes Chapter 8: Safety First Chapter 9: Safe Living

Chapter 10: I'll Be There For You Chapter 11: Never Too Young, Never Too Old Chapter 12: Independence Day Chapter 13: Food For Thought Chapter 14: Your Health, Your Wealth Chapter 15: A Lifelong Journey Chapter 16: Deep Impact Chapter 17: As Good Ad It Gets Chapter 18: A Test of Time L&S READING WRITING GRAMMAR NUMBER i. T ii. T iii T iv T v. T vi. T vii.T viii.T ix. T x. T i ii iii iv form 2 Chapter 1: What People Do Chapter 2 : Villagers and Their Livelihood Chapter 3 : Famous Faces Chapter 4 : Stop Air Pollution! Chapter 5 : Flood Woes Chapter 6 : Give Us Space To Run And Play Chapter 7 : Time Is Gold Chapter 8 : What Are Friends For? Chapter 9: Looking Good, Feeling Great! Chapter 10: Food For Thought Chapter 11: Fun Ways To Fitness Chapter 12: Going Organic Chapter 13: Our Green Heritage Chapter 14: Innovations in Technology

LEARNING OUTCOMES FORM 1 LISTENING & SPEAKING


1.0. Language For Interpersonal Use 1.1. Make friends and keep relationships by a. Introducing oneself L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L3. (viii) Writing a short letter to friend about ones hopes and ambitions, etc. b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information (iii). Responding appropriately to questions by stating, refuting and giving details L2. (vi). Participating in T-guide discussions on topic of interest by agreeing or disagreeing to opinions L3. (x). Reading newspaper articles, etc and discussing points of interest with friends c. Talking about self, family and friends, interests, etc, and understand when others talk about themselves L2. (viii). Writing a short letter to a friend about ones hopes, interests, ambitions, etc d. Exchanging ideas, information and opinions on topics of interest L1. (ii) Asking questions politely to get information (iii) Responding appropriately to questions by stating, refuting and giving details L2. (vii). Seeking clarification on what was said and responding appropriately 1.2. Take part in social interaction by a. carrying out a variety of language functions; L1. (i) Expressing congratulations and responding appropriately. (ii) Giving compliments and responding appropriately (iv) Giving oral and written instruction to do something L2.(v) Writing simple messages to friends and family members relating to the above functions L3. (viii) Writing simple letters to friends and relatives b. Participating in conversations and discussions ; L2. (vi) Participating in a conversation by agreeing or disagreeing politely with other c. making plans and arrangements L2. (vii). Making decisions with others to do something. 1.3. Obtain goods and services by making enquires and ordering goods and services L1. (i) Enquiring as to what a facility has. (ii) Understanding the types of services available as posted outside the facility. L2. (iii) Making further enquires as to details about the services and the services offered.. (iv) Responding appropriately on receiving the information L3. (v) Filling out an application form. READING SKILLS

1.1. Make friends and keep relationships by b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information (iii). Responding appropriately to questions by stating, refuting and giving details L2. (vi). Participating in T-guide discussions on topic of interest by agreeing or disagreeing to opinions L3. (x). Reading newspaper articles, etc and discussing points of interest with friends 1.2. Take part in social interaction by b. Participating in conversations and discussions ; L2. (vi) Participating in a conversation by agreeing or disagreeing politely with other 2.0. Language for Informational Use 2.1. Obtain information for different purposes by a. Listening to talks, speeches and other multimedia sources L1/2/3. (i). Listening to and understanding a variety of texts of suitable length b. Reading materials such as articles in print and electronic media L1/2/3. (ii) Reading silently and aloud with understanding a variety of texts of suitable length (iii) Acquiring information skills: using the table of contents to look for information

2.2. Process Information by; a. skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas. L1. B (i) Stating what type of text that is being read. (ii) Scanning for details b. Extracting main ideas and supporting details L1, A(ii) Noting important details L2.A(iv) Identifying important ideas by listening and checking L3. A (v) Jotting down key ideas of a text listened to (who, what, when, how, why) L2. B (vi) Identifying main ideas in simple text (vii) Identifying supporting details or ideas c. Following sequence of ideas L2.A(iii) Following sequence of ideas L3.B(iii) Following sequence of ideas. d. predicting outcomes L3. B (x) Identifying cause and effect in simple texts (xi) making simple predictions of outcomes, giving reasons (xii) Drawing obvious conclusions in simple texts e. Using dictionaries f. Getting meaning of unfamiliar words by using word attack skills L2.B (iv) Using dictionary to find the meaning of unfamiliar words. L2.B (x) acquiring a range of vocabulary L3.B (ix) Acquiring the meaning of words using word formation, base words and contextual clues WRITING SKILLS

apter 2 :Family Trees

apter 8: Safety First

1.1. Make friends and keep relationships by b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information (iii). Responding appropriately to questions by stating, refuting and giving details L2. (vi). Participating in T-guide discussions on topic of interest by agreeing or disagreeing to opinions L3. (x). Reading newspaper articles, etc and discussing points of interest with friends 1.2. Take part in social interaction by b. Participating in conversations and discussions ; L2. (vi) Participating in a conversation by agreeing or disagreeing politely with other 2.3. Presenting Information to different audience by; a. Writing directions, instructions, recounts, announcements using appropriate formats and conventions L2. (xvii). Writing recounts, ect (xviii). Writing descriptions, etc (xix) Punctuating meaningfully using capital letters, commas, full stops, question marks L3: (xix) Writing a simple report complete with tables and/or pie-charts. b. Giving instructions, describing, narrating orally; L1: (xiv) Recounting orally what events took place c. Composing, revising and editing drafts, and checking accuracy of spelling, punctuation and grammar L1: (xvi) taking spelling and dictation of seen texts L2: (xix) Punctuating meaningfully using appropriate punctuations L3: (xx) Applying process writing skills by a. Discussing topic with teacher and peers and jotting down ideas b. Writing out an outline c. Writing paragraphs with a clear focus d. Revising and editing the draft until it is clear and flow well e. Proof-reading the draft to eliminate mistakes f. Writing the final draft of the text LITERATURE 3.0. Language For Aesthetic Use 31. Listen to, read, view and respond to literary works by; a. Understanding and telling in one's own words the story/poem heard or read and giving one's opinion L1. (iii). Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. L1. (ii) Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary b. Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting L2. (iv). Giving sequence of events L3. (vi). Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. L3. (ix). Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life L3. (XII). Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level c. Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. L2. (viii). Talking about values in a text. L3. (xi) Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story d. Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs L2. (v) Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph e. Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. L1. (i) Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm L2. (x) saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

3.2. Express themselves creatively and imaginatively by a. Dramatizing texts and role-playing characters b. Retelling a story from a different point of view and presenting it in another genre c. Composing simple poems, and stories and dialogues L1. (i) Acting out sections of a text. L1 (i) Retelling a story from different point of view and presenting it in another genre L2. (ii) Changing the text to another form (genre) L3. (iii) Composing simple poem, stories and dialogue at a level suitable to learner

LEARNING OBJECTIVES talk about the topic taught orally introduce themselves to each other talk about himself/herself in English to the class talk orally on the topic studied in English relate the topic learnt with the real situation and general issues give own suitable and appropriate ideas and opinion on the topic learnt respond to questions politely and appropriately involve in class discussion in English complete the tasks given related to the topic taught answer at least 50% of the queastions given correctly(weak students) answer at least 80% of the questions given correctly (good classes) give correct meaning to words heard or learnt orraly based on context complete all the tasks given. form grammatically correct sentences orraly identify main ideas and supporting ideas from the texts read/heard give correct and appropriate meaning to words read or heard based on contex talk/explain what the text read/heard is about in own words interpret the text read or heard correctly and accordingly identify suitable contents from the text read to complete the tasks or questions arrange the ideas or events in the text in correct order match the questions with the answer correctly complete the sentences given correctly answer at least 50% of the queastions given correctly(weak students) answer at least 80% of the questions given correctly (good classes) expand the ideas or information from the text read or heard in other skills understand and apply the skills in answering comprehension questions in real situation differentiate differences among the categories of language items taught use the language items taught or learnt correctly orally and in writing apply what they had learnt in real situation improve their writing ability using what they had learnt in grammar classes decide when, where and how to use different language items in writing or orally answer at least 50% of the questions given correctly( weak students) answer at least 80% of the questions given correctly (good classes) answer all the questions correctly realise their mistakes and errors and make changes in future understand and apply strategies and tips used in certain genre identify and apply different stages when writing essay in English understand and apply the correct format used in certain writing genre use correct and suitable language items in their essay based on question use correct sentence structure used for certain essay types

choose and use suitable vocabularies in their essay based on question's requirement write at least short and simple sentences in their essay (weak students) write quality essay with own words (good students) write essay with minimum help from teacher (good students) write simple and short essay with maximum help from teacher (weak student) write by copying from the model essay given (weak students) apply what they had learnt in real situation identify the errors and mistakes and make changes in future use correct tenses and suitable words based on topic or question given identify the content points from the text and arrange in order summarize the text using the content points identified earlier read and understand what the text is about when writing a summary summarize the text using own words as much as possible (good students) summarize by copying or lifting from the text (weak students) describe the characters in the story based on the evidence from the story talk about the story read in own words (good students) arrange the events in the story correctly explain what the story is about based on the story read give meaning of words found in literary works baesd on context identify the meaning of each line in the poem read or heard interpret the text read or heard correctly and accordingly answer the questions given correctly based on the story or poem studied write short account of the theme and morale values found in the story or poem studied

REFLECTION
All students from good class able to follow and understand the lesson. It is easy for the good students to understand and apply it in task given Most of the students in good class involve in discussion and respond well It is difficult to get most of the students in weak class to understand. Students in weak class have difficulty in understanding and applying in task Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions Students in weak class having difficulty in using the right words in their writing or task Stds in weak class having difficulty in applying what they had learnt Stds. In weak class having difficulty in using English language orally and in writing Most of the students having problem with literary terms used in the poems and short stories Most of the students having problem expressing their ideas in English Language Most of the weak students having difficulty in forming correct sentence structures in writing Some of the good stds still having difficulty in forming correct sent. structures in their writing Most of the weak students having difficulty in forming correct sentence structures in writing Most of the weak students did not show interest in English The lesson goes on smoothly and achieves its objective(s) Some students in good class still showing negative attitude toward the subject and lesson

FOLLOW-UP ACTION Give more challenging task to the good students. Give minimum questions to weak students Focus on certain topic/skill at time to weak students Give more oral exercises for them to practice using the language Sometimes have to explain in their mother tongue to get them understand Give more vocabularies or words to students related to topic Ask the students to copy the answer as model for them to follow Encourage students t read more and use the languae often Encourage students to read more literary works Expose students to materials in English as model Give more practice on using English in their writing Start with simple sentence in order to familiarise them Try and always trying to gain their interest in the subject (English) Use all ways to change their attitude toward the language and perception Keep on with the objectives and strategies;with some modification

CLOSING summarizes the lesson. asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught gives all important points taught in the lesson reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson gives homework: Expansion Exercise related to the topic taught.

TOPIC FORM 2

TOPIC FORM 3

set induction shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. plays song/music related to the topic and tells the students what to do. reads out articles/texts/stories related to topic and tells students to listen carefully asks oral questions related to the songs/musics/articles given. revises the previous lesson bys asking oral questions or asking stds. to talk on it. gives situation/does actions to engage students to the topic. gives short quize related to the topic or lesson tells the objectives of the particular lesson. tells what the students will or required to do in the particular lesson. tells the focus of the particular lesson. students should respond appropriately to all the questions asked or when required. Presentation Listening & Speaking introduces the topic and all related information. explains the topic or focus lesson in detail to the class. gives/shows articles/pict./videos to engage the students with the topic of the lesson gives tasks/execises based on the articles/pictures, etc, gets some students to talk/tell orally on the articles/pictures, etc, given earlier gets students to talk or give opinion or ideas on the topic taught tells students to read the articles/texts aloud with correct pronounciation and grammar tells students to complete the task given and students should complete within time given gives some tips or guides on how to respond to oral questions in examination tells students to explore the text/article/picture given tells stds to complete the task using the infor. from the article/text, etc..read or heard gets some students to read out or tell answer to the task orally tells students to listen carefully to the text read aloud/played on tape. reads or plays the text or passage aloud once tells students to listen carefully and get important details gives tasks to students and tells them what to do while listening to text read or played reads or plays the text again. orders the students given to complete the task while listening to text read or played checks and discusses the task with the class or students and tells students to do correction. gets students read out their answer and does correction to their mistakes shows example of quests asked in exam based on the topic taught throughout the chapter. Grammar introduces the language item that students will learn in this lesson. shows and explains in detail the language item (grammar) taught. gives examples of words/lists related to the language items taught. shows and explains how to use the language item (grammars) in sentences or writing asks students makes sentence/complete oral task using the language item taught expects students to be able to respond to questions asked

revises what the students had learnt in the previous lesson gives exercise related to the language item/grammar taught tells the students to complete the exercise in pair/small group or individually expects students to complete the exercise in pair/small group or individually checks and corrects the exercise given earlier shows and explains model questions usually asked in examination gives articles or texts and gives task based on the article given: identify gives real examination questions as pracitce exercise Reading gives and explains in detail tips or guidance in answering compreh.questions in exam. gives examples on types of questions usually asked in examination discusses the examples and shows how to tackle each type of questions gives sample passages and questions and tells students what they are going to do shows or explains how to get or look for information or important points from the text. gives more sample questions and tells students to try them out checks and discusses the sample questions gives comprehension passage to students and tells them what to do. asks stds to read the passage silently and tell what the text is about in their own words. tells the stds to reread the text and answer all the quests. given in pair/individually. reminds students on tips or strategies in answering comprehension questions checks and discusses the exercise tells students to read their answer aloud walks around and focuses in helping the weak students gives homework: More reading passages or articles summarizes the content of the passages gets some students to give own ideas or opinion on the content of the passage or article revises the previous lesson checks students' homework revises and reminds the students on the tips in answering comprehension questions. WRITING shows pictures/articles/teaching aids/ etc and asks oral questions expects students to respond to questions asked distributes articles/pictures/teaching materials, etc and explains what to do explains articles/pictures,etc in detail. explains important aspects that the students should know in writing essay. gives examples of the important aspects tells what the students will learn (writing genre) in the particular lesson. briefly explains the genre taught in the particular lesson.
introduces/shows and explains in detail the tips/strategies to write essay for particular genre

shows/gives and explains the sample essay for the particular genre or essay type taught tells students to copy notes related to the lesson of the day. expects students to copy notes shows & explains in detail the format or generic structure of the essay for particular genre shows and explains the layout of the essay : Introduction, Body and Closing gives examples of the structure or format of the essay

explains by pointing out the important elements or aspects related to the structure/format shows sample essay related to the genre taught explains by pointing out the correct format or structure in the essay tells students to copy the format or structure and reminds them to follow in real situation introduces language elements used for particular genre or essay type shows and explains in detail the language structures introduced earlier gives and explains the language structure or items for specific genre gives examples on how to use the language structure in writing their essay shows sample essay and points out the language items learnt earlier found in the essay gives execises for the students to complete related to the language items introduced earlier checks and corrects exercises with the students tells the students that they will see the model essay in this lesson shows and explains numberous of sample essay related to the genre taught tells the students to identify the structure or format used in the sample essay shows and explains the essay structure used in the sample essay reminds the stds to follow the structure if they want to score good mark in examination gives task to the students: identify the language items related to genre from the sample expects students to read out aloud their answer and show to the class shows and explains the language items used in the essay (sample essay) gives written exerices to the students checks and corrects exercise (if time premitted) tells the students that they will learn how to start writing the essay shows the correct sentence structure used to write particular essay based on genre taught tells students to give ideas or opinions of their own while teacher writes the essay on board expects students to involve in the joint writing session shows the appropriate and correct structure and language used to write introduction shows by writing on the board how to write the body (based on question's requirement) shows by writing on the board how to write the introduction (based on que's requirement) shows by writing on the board how to write the closing (based on question's requirement) gives task for students to complete in class or at home divides students into group and assigns tasks to every group tells one group to write the introduction, other write the body and some write closing tells students to write individually and write until they get the best result tells some students from different groups to read out aloud their essay listens and corrects students' task tells students to combine (after checking) their essay and write complete essay tells the students that they will be writing complete essay on their own in this lesson reminds students to refer to what they had learnt or copied throughout the previous lessons gives articles/pictures/questions to every student and explains what to do. tells students to look for information from the articles or texts given such as vocabulary, etc tells students to list down all important information in the articles, etc that they'll use later distributes question to every student and explains how to complete it reminds all the skills that thay had learnt previously tells students to write the essay individually with some teacher's help expects students to complete essay individually with minimum or maximum guide reminds students to use all the information learnt earlier to help them in writing the essay gives expansion exercise related to the genre or topic taught reminds students to pass up their essay form checking and correcting

reminds students to write more often on their own in order to improve their writing skills

CLASS 1 ARIF 1 BESTARI 1 CEKAL 1 DEDIKASI 1 ELIT 2 ARIF 2 BESTARI 2 CEKAL 2 DEDIKASI 2 ELIT 3 ARIF 3 BESTARI 3 CEKAL 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT 4 ARIF 4 BESTARI 4 CEKAL 4 DEDIKASI 4 ELIT 5 ARIF 5 BESTARI 5 CEKAL 5 DEDIKASI 5 ELIT

NILAM CLASS PKS 1 PKS 2 MONTHLY TEST 1 MONTHLY TEST 2 PUBLIC HOLIDAY OCCASSIONAL HOLIDAY MID-SEMESTER HOLIDAYS SEMESTER HOLIDAYS YEAR END HOLIDAYS CHINESE NEW YEAR NEW YEAR HOLIDAY GAWAI DAYAK HARI RAYA PUASA HARI RAYA HAJI WESAK DAY

NO TEACHING - LEARNING
REVISION CORRECTION GRAPHIC MATERIALS GRAMMAR CLOSEST IN MEANING READING COMPREHENSION PAPER 1 PAPER 2 ESSAY SUMMARY LITERATURE COMPONENT

REVISION does quick revision on tips and strategies in answering related topics/skills/section shows sample questions explains the sample questions shows and explains past year questions in detail gives questions (exercise) related to the section/skill taught tells what the students need to do checks and corrects students works. asks students to tell their answer individually/whole class expects students to complete the exercise individually/small group/orally tells the actually answer to the class and explains why the answer is correct or wrong tells students to do their correction and make changes to their answer (if wrong) gives some tips and strategies to answer related skills/section/paper CORRECTION gives general comment on students' performance in the related paper gives some suggestions on how to improve their achievement in related paper returns students question's paper and gives some comment to related students shows and explains the answer for every question and section gets student randomly to give their answer to certain question and asks them to explains their choice comments on their answer and tells why the answer is wrong or correct tell students to do their correction in their note book expects the students to do their correction and hand in to the teacher shows the suggected answer for the essay/summary question, tells the students to copy the suggested answer (esp, the weak students) reminds students to apply the skills and tips in the next tests/exams. does correction for Paper 1 : Section A & B (Question 1 - 18) does correction for Paper 1 : Section C (Question 19 - 24) does correction for Paper 1 : Section D (Question 25 - 40) does correction for Paper 2 : Section A (Question 1 - Guided Essay) does correction for Paper 2 : Section B (Question 2 : Literature Component) does correction for paper 2 : Section C ( Question 3 : Summary)

time duration 40 Minutes 80 Minutes (5 - 7 Minutes) (3 - 5 Minutes) (30 Minutes) (3 - 5 Minutes) (70 Minutes) 0705 - 0825 0825 - 0945 0905 - 1025 1045 - 1205 1125 - 1245 1205 - 1325 0705 - 0745 0745 - 0825 0825 - 0905 0905 - 0945 0945 - 1025 1045 - 1125 1125 - 1205 1205 - 1245 1245 - 1325

LEARNING OUTCOMES/OBJECTIVES FORM 1 CHAPTER 1: Getting to know you. Interpersonal Taking part in conversations and discussions. Introducing oneself. Talking about self, friends and interests and understanding others Talking about self, family, friends, interests, past events and feelings Reading materials such as articles in print and in electronic media skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas Using dictionaries Composing, revising and editing drafts and checking accuracy of spelling, etc Chapter 2: Family Ties Talking about self, family, friends, interests, past events and feelings Reading materials such as articles in print and in electronic media Listening to spoken texts such as talks, speeches and texts from other sources skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas Writing Essay: Recounts Chapter 3: Stand By Me Taking part in conversations and discussions Skimming for specific information and ideas Writing Recount Chapte r4: It All Starts At Home exchanging ideas and giving opinions on topic of interest Participating in conversations and discussions exchanging ideas and giving opinions on topic of interest Listening to spoken texts such as talks, speeches, and texts from other sources Reading materials such as articles in print and in electronic media Skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas Chapter 5: Do you care enough? Exchanging ideas and giving opinions on topic of interest Participating in conversations and discussions Reading materials such as talks, speeches, and texts from other sources Skimming and scanning for specific information Writing announcements, using appropriate format and conventions Chapter 6: What A Wonderful World! Exchanging ideas and giving opinions on topic of interest Reading materials such as articles in print and in electronic media Writing directions, instructions, recounts and announcements using appropriate format

Skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas Getting meanings of unfamiliar words by using word attack skill Extracting main ideas and supporting details Following sequence of events Chapter 7 Safe Homes Taking part in conversation and discussions Exchanging ideas and giving opinions on topics of interest Writing directions, instructions, recounts and announcements using appropriate fromat Reading materials such as articles in print and in electronic media Listening to spoken texts such as talks, speeches, and texts from other sources Chapter 8: Safety first Taking part in conversation and discussions Taking dictation of seen texts Skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas Following sequence of events Reading materials such as articles in print and in electronic media Listening to spoken texts such as talks, speeches, and texts from other sources Writing directions, instructions, recounts and announcements using appropriate fromat

topic form 2 Chapter 1: What People Do Chapter 2:

Topic Form 3 Chapter 1 : They Touch Our Life Chapter 2 : Chapter 3 : Chapter 4 : Chapter 5 :

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 1 ARIF TIME 0825 - 0905 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes THEME Introduction To English Language Form 1 Syllabus TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEDNESDAY 02 JAN

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i remember and follow what they should do throughout the year in Form 1

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE :

MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS DAY : MONDAY

TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DATE :

02

SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

WEDNESDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY

2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 1 ARIF TIME 0825 - 0905 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEDNESDAY 02 JAN

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE :

MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS DAY : MONDAY

TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DATE :

02

SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

WEDNESDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY

2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE :

MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS DAY : MONDAY

TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DATE :

02

SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME DAY : DATE : 02 MONDAY SEPT

TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY

2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE :

MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS DAY : MONDAY

TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DATE :

02

SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY

2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 2 ARIF TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : MONDAY 07 JAN

a. Introducing oneself L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. (iii). Responding appropriately to questions by stating, refuting and giving details L2. (vi). Participating in T-guide discussions on topic of interest by agreeing or disagreeing to opinions

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i talk about the topic taught orally ii talk about himself/herself in English to the class iii talk orally on the topic studied in English TEACHING MATERIAL(S) Refer to Text Book (Pg1-3) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T gives situation/does actions to engage students to the topic. ii. T asks oral questions related to the songs/musics/articles given. iii T tells the objectives of the particular lesson. PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T introduces the topic and all related information. ii. T explains the topic or focus lesson in detail to the class. iii T gets some students to talk/tell orally on the articles/pictures, etc, given earlier iv T gets students to talk or give opinion or ideas on the topic taught v. T tells stds to complete the task using the infor. from the article/text, etc..read or heard vi. T tells students to complete the task given and students should complete within time given vi. T checks and discusses the task with the class or students and tells students to do correction.

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS 2 ARIF TIME TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : TUESDAY 08 JAN

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS 2 ARIF TIME TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE :

11

FRIDAY JAN

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 2 ARIF DAY : MONDAY

TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DATE :

14

JAN

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME 2 ARIF DAY : DATE : TUESDAY 15 JAN

TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 2 ARIF 80 Minutes DAY : DATE : 18 FRIDAY JAN

THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

en ion.

TUESDAY 2013

FRIDAY 2013

MONDAY

2013

TUESDAY 2013

FRIDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 2 ARIF TIME 1245 - 1325 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : MONDAY 07 JAN

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE :

MONDAY 02 SEPT

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS DAY : MONDAY

TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DATE :

02

SEPT

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME DAY : DATE : 02 MONDAY SEPT

TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY

2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE :

MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS DAY : MONDAY

TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DATE :

02

SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY

2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME 1125 - 1245 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1 : They Touch Our Life TOPIC Talk about famous personalities SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information d. Exchanging ideas, information and opinions on topics of interest L1. (ii) Asking questions politely to get information

DAY : DATE : WEEK

MONDAY 07 JAN 2

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. ii. T reads out articles/texts/stories related to topic and tells students to listen carefully iii T gives situation/does actions to engage students to the topic. vi. T tells the objectives of the particular lesson. PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T introduces the topic and all related information. ii. T explains the topic or focus lesson in detail to the class. iii T gets students to talk or give opinion or ideas on the topic taught iv T gives/shows articles/pict./videos to engage the students with the topic of the lesson v. T tells students to read the articles/texts aloud with correct pronounciation and grammar I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (3 - 5 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK TUESDAY 08 JAN 2

b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information (iii). Responding appropriately to questions by stating, refuting and giving details d. Exchanging ideas, information and opinions on topics of interest (iii). Responding appropriately to questions by stating, refuting and giving details L2. (vi). Participating in T-guide discussions on topic of interest by agreeing or disagreeing to opinions

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T revises the previous lesson bys asking oral questions or asking stds. to talk on it. ii. T gives situation/does actions to engage students to the topic. iii T tells what the students will or required to do in the particular lesson. PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T explains the topic or focus lesson in detail to the class. I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE : WEEK

WEDNESDAY 09 JAN 2

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS DAY : MONDAY

TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DATE :

02

SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

WEDNESDAY 2013

MONDAY

2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE :

MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS DAY : MONDAY

TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DATE :

02

SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY

2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS : : GRAPHIC MATERIALS MONDAY DAY : DATE : 02 JAN

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION: I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013)

BAHASA INGGERIS
CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: 1 ARIF DAY DATE MONDAY 02 JAN

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS

CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

1 ARIF

DAY DATE

MONDAY 02 JAN

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME 1 ARIF DAY DATE MONDAY 02 JAN

THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME THEME 1 ARIF DAY DATE MONDAY 02 JAN

TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC 1 ARIF DAY DATE 02 MONDAY JAN

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS 1 ARIF DAY DATE MONDAY 02 JAN

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: 1 ARIF DAY DATE MONDAY 02 JAN

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)

TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: 1 ARIF DAY DATE 02 MONDAY JAN

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)

TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: 1 ARIF DAY DATE MONDAY 02 JAN

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)

TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS : : GRAPHIC MATERIALS MONDAY DAY : DATE : 02 JAN

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION: I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013)

BAHASA INGGERIS
CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: 1 ARIF DAY DATE MONDAY 02 JAN

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS

CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

1 ARIF

DAY DATE

MONDAY 02 JAN

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME 1 ARIF DAY DATE MONDAY 02 JAN

THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME THEME 1 ARIF DAY DATE MONDAY 02 JAN

TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC 1 ARIF DAY DATE 02 MONDAY JAN

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS 1 ARIF DAY DATE MONDAY 02 JAN

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: 1 ARIF DAY DATE MONDAY 02 JAN

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)

TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: 1 ARIF DAY DATE 02 MONDAY JAN

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)

TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: 1 ARIF DAY DATE MONDAY 02 JAN

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)

TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME : : THURSDAY DAY : DATE : 24 JAN

PUBLIC HOLIDAY

HARI MAULIDUL RASUL

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME DAY DATE

PUBLIC HOLIDAY

CHINESE NEW YEAR 2013 ( 11 - 15 FEBRUARY 2013)

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME 1 ARIF DAY DATE 02 MONDAY JAN

HARI ORIENTASI PELAJAR TINGKATAN 1

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013)

BAHASA INGGERIS
CLASS TIME 1 ARIF DAY DATE MONDAY 02 JAN

NO TEACHING - LEARNING

HARI ORIENTASI PELAJAR TINGKATAN 1

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS

CLASS TIME

1 ARIF

DAY DATE

MONDAY 02 JAN

NO TEACHING - LEARNING

HARI ORIENTASI PELAJAR TINGKATAN 1

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS 1 ARIF DAY MONDAY

TIME

DATE

02

JAN

NO TEACHING - LEARNING

HARI ORIENTASI PELAJAR TINGKATAN 1

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME 1 ARIF DAY DATE MONDAY 02 JAN

NO TEACHING - LEARNING

HARI ORIENTASI PELAJAR TINGKATAN 1

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME 1 ARIF DAY DATE MONDAY 02 JAN

NO TEACHING - LEARNING

HARI ORIENTASI PELAJAR TINGKATAN 1

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME 1 ARIF DAY DATE 02 MONDAY JAN

NO TEACHING - LEARNING

HARI ORIENTASI PELAJAR TINGKATAN 1

RANCANGAN MENGAJAR HARIAN (2013) BAHASA INGGERIS


CLASS TIME THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: 1 ARIF DAY DATE MONDAY 02 JAN

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S)

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)

TEACHING PROCEDURES SET -INDUCTION I T ii T iii T PRESENTATION:

CLOSING

REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

THURSDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY

2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 ELIT TIME 1205 - 1245 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1 : They Touch Our Life TOPIC Talk about famous personalities SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK MONDAY 07 JAN 2

a. Introducing oneself L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L3. (viii) Writing a short letter to friend about ones hopes and ambitions, etc. b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information c. Talking about self, family and friends, interests, etc, and understand when others talk about themselves L2. (viii). Writing a short letter to a friend about ones hopes, interests, ambitions, etc L2.(v) Writing simple messages to friends and family members relating to the above functions

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i talk about the topic taught orally ii respond to questions politely and appropriately TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Textbook - pg 1 - 2

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. ii. T reads out articles/texts/stories related to topic and tells students to listen carefully iii T gives situation/does actions to engage students to the topic. vi. T tells the objectives of the particular lesson. PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T introduces the topic and all related information. ii. T explains the topic or focus lesson in detail to the class. iii T gets students to talk or give opinion or ideas on the topic taught iv T gives/shows articles/pict./videos to engage the students with the topic of the lesson v. T

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information (iii). Responding appropriately to questions by stating, refuting and giving details b. Extracting main ideas and supporting details L1, A(ii) Noting important details a. Listening to talks, speeches and other multimedia sources L1/2/3. (i). Listening to and understanding a variety of texts of suitable length

DAY : DATE : WEEK

TUESDAY 08 JAN 2

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i answer at least 50% of the queastions given correctly(weak students) ii identify main ideas and supporting ideas from the texts read/heard TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Textbook, printed work sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T tells the students what they are going to do in this lesson ii. T explains the activities of the day in detail iii T distributes the handout (Work sheet) to every students. iv T tells the students that a text will be read aloud and they should listen carefully iv T tells students to jot down important details and try to answer the questions given v. T makes sure students complete their task while listening vi. T reread the text and tells the students to double check their answer vii.T gets students (choose randomly) to answer the questions given earlier viii.T checks and corrects students task CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions Note: Form 3D, refer to Form 3 Elit's Lesson (Monday: 7/1/2013) FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE : WEEK

WEDNESDAY 09 JAN 2

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Text Book (pg 4 - 6)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T introduces reading skills and gives some tips on how to answer comprehension questions. ii. T explains how to look for main ideas/details, supporting details and looking for meaning of words iii T tells students to read an article on MERCY Malaysia and spot main ideas and supporting details. iv T shows how to identify main and supporting details in the text v. T shows how to guess the meaning of words based on context. vi. T tells the students to reread the article and answer the questions given (Task A & B - pg5) vii.T monitors the students while they complete the tasks. viii.T checks and corrects the questions with the class. ix. T gives homework ( Task C & D - pg 6) CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI DAY : THURSDAY

TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes People THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DATE :

10

JAN

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T introduces reading skills and gives some tips on how to answer comprehension questions. ii. T explains how to look for main ideas/details, supporting details and looking for meaning of words iii T tells students to read an article on MERCY Malaysia and spot main ideas and supporting details. iv T shows how to identify main and supporting details in the text v. T shows how to guess the meaning of words based on context. vi. T tells the students to read the article and identify main and supporting details vii.T gives new words/vocabularies and tells the students to look for their meaning (Homework)

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) I T I T I T REFLECTION:

(5 - 7 Minutes)

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT DAY : DATE : 11 FRIDAY JAN

TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Textbook, Printed Materials

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T does quick revision on how to answer comprehension questions ii. T distributes a text on famous personality iii T explains what the students will do with the text Students read the text and answer the Objective questions given iv T monitors students while they complete the exercise v. T checks and corrects the questions given with the students vi. T reminds the students to do their correction.

I I I

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) T T T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 3 ELIT 40 Minutes DAY : DATE : WEEK MONDAY 14 JAN 3

THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Printed Note, Work Sheets, Textbook

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T shows pict./articles, etc, and asks oral questions related to the materials shown. vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T explains in details to language items taught ( WH - Words) ii. T gives examples on how to use the words and responds to questions iii T tells the students to refer to the examples in textbook (pg 3) iv T gives exercise to the students and tells what they will do Students complete the task with teacher's guide and monitoring v. T checks and does correction with the class vi. T tells the students to do their correction.

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME 3 DEDIKASI 40 Minutes 3 ELIT 40 Minutes DAY : DATE : WEEK 15 TUESDAY JAN 3

TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

NILAM - READING BOOKS AT LIBRARY

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC 3 DEDIKASI 40 Minutes 3 ELIT 80 Minutes DAY : DATE : WEEK : WEDNESDAY 16 JAN 3

SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Printed Notes, Work Sheets, Textbook

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T vii.T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T tells the students to refer to textbook (pg 8) and read the notes given ii. T gives extra note and explains to the students iii T gives examples on how to use in oral and written language iv T shows example on types of questions asked in examination v. T tells the students to answer task (Task B & C - pg8) vi. T checks and does correction with the students vii.T reminds the students to do their correction

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC 3 DEDIKASI 40 Minutes DAY : DATE : 17 THURSDAY JAN

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T tells the students to refer to textbook (pg 8) and read the notes given ii. T gives extra note and explains to the students iii T gives examples on how to use in oral and written language iv T shows example on types of questions asked in examination v. T tells the students to answer task (Task B - pg8) vi. T checks and does correction with the students vi. T reminds the students to do their correction vii.T tells the students to complete Task C as homework CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) T T T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

I I I

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME 1045 - 1205 0705 - 0745 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : 18 WEEK : FRIDAY JAN 3

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T does quick revision on how to use the language items taught in orevious lesson ii. T distributes exercise (Work Sheet) to the students and explains what they will do Students answer the tasks given ( Actual Exam Questions) individually and limited guide iii T walks around to help weak students iv T checks and does correction with the class by asking the students to give their answer v. T explains and shows why the answer is right or wrong vi. T tells students to do their correction

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME 1205 - 1245 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK 21 MONDAY JAN 4

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes the language item to be taught ii. T explains the language item - Adjectives iii T shows the formation and uses of adjectives iv T shows examples on how the adjectives are used in the text or description v. T tells students to complete the tasks in textbook pg 9 - 10 vi. T Students complete tasks with teacher's guidiance and help where necessary vii.T checks and does correction the questions given earlier

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK TUESDAY 22 JAN 4

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T does quick revision by asking questions on what students had learnt in previous lesson ii. T expects students to give positive respond iii T gives task to student - refer to text/article iv T tells students to identify adjectives found in the article (description of people) v. T asks students to list down adjectives that they manage to identify in the articl vi. T provides other adjectives that are not listed by the students vii.T tells students to do their revision

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 80 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK 23 WEDNESDAY JAN 4

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T distributes worksheet - Examination oriented questions ii. T tells students what they will do iii T students answer the objective questions individually wint minimal help from teacher iv T discusses the questions with the students - telling why the answers are right or wrong. v. T reminds students to remember types of questions asked and do correction vi. T gives another exercise to be finished at home (Homework) and reminds them to bring on Friday

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK 25 FRIDAY JAN 4

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T does quick revision by asking questions on what students had learnt in previous lesson ii. T expects students to give positive respond iii T gives task to student - refer to text/article iv T tells students to identify adjectives found in the article (description of people) v. T asks students to list down adjectives that they manage to identify in the articl vi. T provides other adjectives that are not listed by the students vii.T tells students to do their revision

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK TUESDAY 15 JAN 3

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK 15 TUESDAY JAN 3

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

ves

TUESDAY 2013

WEDNESDAY 2013

ons. g of words g details.

5)

THURSDAY

2013

ons. g of words g details.

work)

FRIDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

WEDNESDAY 2013

THURSDAY 2013

FRIDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

WEDNESDAY 2013

on Friday

FRIDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 ELIT TIME 1205 - 1245 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1 : They Touch Our Life TOPIC Talk about famous personalities SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK MONDAY 07 JAN 2

a. Introducing oneself L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L3. (viii) Writing a short letter to friend about ones hopes and ambitions, etc. b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information c. Talking about self, family and friends, interests, etc, and understand when others talk about themselves L2. (viii). Writing a short letter to a friend about ones hopes, interests, ambitions, etc L2.(v) Writing simple messages to friends and family members relating to the above functions

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i talk orally on the topic studied in English ii give own suitable and appropriate ideas and opinion on the topic learnt iii respond to questions politely and appropriately TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Textbook (pg 1 - 2)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes some names of famous personalities in Malaysia ii. T asks oral questions related to the names given to gauge how far the students know about them iii T introduces the topic and objectives of the lesson vi. T tells what the students will do in this particular lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T tells the students to refer to text book (pg1) and asks them to study the pictures carefully ii. T asks oral questions related to information on the given pictures iii T expects students to be able to give correct respond iv T gives details of the persons shown in the pictures v. T gives important aspects that are used to talk about the famous personality vi. T gives tasks: Task: get details of their friend sitting next to them vi. T asks students to talk about their friend using the details given earlier vii.T monitors and checks their mistakes and also corrects them CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i It is difficult to get most of the students in weak class to understand. ii Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i Give minimum questions to weak students ii Sometimes have to explain in their mother tongue to get them understand

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS 3 ELIT TIME 1245 - 1325 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC Listen to listening text of famous personalities SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK TUESDAY 08 JAN 2

a. Introducing oneself L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L3. (viii) Writing a short letter to friend about ones hopes and ambitions, etc. b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information c. Talking about self, family and friends, interests, etc, and understand when others talk about themselves L2. (viii). Writing a short letter to a friend about ones hopes, interests, ambitions, etc L2.(v) Writing simple messages to friends and family members relating to the above functions

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i complete the tasks given related to the topic taught ii answer at least 50% of the queastions given correctly(weak students) TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Textbook, Work Sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T revises what they had learnt in the previous lesson ii. T asks some students to tell in their own words what they had learnt in the last lesson iii T introduces the objectives of the lesson iv T tells them to prepare for the following activities PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T tells the students what they are going to do in this lesson ii. T explains the activities of the day in detail iii T distributes the handout (Work sheet) to every students. iv T tells the students that a text will be read aloud and they should listen carefully v. T tells students to jot down important details and try to answer the questions given vi. T makes sure students complete their task while listening vi. T reread the text and tells the students to double check their answer vii.T gets students (choose randomly) to answer the questions given earlier viii.T checks and corrects students task CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding ii. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i The main problem for this class is understanding what they are learning and English language. ii Only a few could give the correct answer to some of the questions FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i Sometimes have to explain in their mother tongue to get them understand ii Ask the students to copy the answer as model for them to follow

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS 3 ELIT TIME 1045 - 1205 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC Reading Comprehension Skills SUB-TOPIC SKILLS READING LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
2.1. Obtain ibformation for different purposes by i. Listening to and understanding a variety of texts of suitable length ii. Reading materials such as articles silently and aloud with understanding 2.2. Process information by i. Scanning and Skimming for specific information (details) and ideas ii. Extracting main ideas and supporting details iii. Following sequence of ideas, predicting outcomes iv. Getting meaning of unfamiliar words based on context and using dictionary.

DAY : DATE : WEEK

WEDNESDAY 09 JAN 2

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i identify main ideas and supporting ideas from the texts read/heard ii talk/explain what the text read/heard is about in own words iii answer at least 50% of the queastions given correctly(weak students) TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Text Book (pg 4 - 6), Printed note

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T explains what they had learnt in previous lesson ii. T tells the objectives and focus skills of the lesson iii T destributes notes on tips in answering comprehension questions PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T introduces reading skills and gives some tips on how to answer comprehension questions. ii. T explains how to look for main ideas/details, supporting details and looking for meaning of words iii T tells students to read an article on MERCY Malaysia and spot main ideas and supporting details. iv T shows how to identify main and supporting details in the text v. T shows how to guess the meaning of words based on context. vi. T tells the students to reread the article and answer the questions given (Task A & B - pg5) vii.T monitors the students while they complete the tasks. viii.T checks and corrects the questions with the class. ix. T gives homework ( Task C & D - pg 6) CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding ii. T gives all important points taught in the lesson iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i still have the same problem with this group of students ii difficult to get them understand and follow the lesson though I have been teaching them slowly FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i Sometimes have to explain in their mother tongue to get them understand ii Give minimum questions to weak students

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 ELIT DAY : FRIDAY

TIME 0705 - 0745 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes People THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
2.1. Obtain ibformation for different purposes by i. Listening to and understanding a variety of texts of suitable length ii. Reading materials such as articles silently and aloud with understanding 2.2. Process information by i. Scanning and Skimming for specific information (details) and ideas ii. Extracting main ideas and supporting details iii. Following sequence of ideas, predicting outcomes iv. Getting meaning of unfamiliar words based on context and using dictionary.

DATE : WEEK :

11

JAN 2

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to identify main points use to answer the questions i answer at least half of the questions given correctly ii TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Work sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T tells the students what they are going to do in this lesson ii. T reminds the students to complete the task carefully

PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T does quick revision on how to answer comprehension questions in examination (PKS & PMR) ii. T gives another sets of Examination like questions and tells what they will do iii T Students answer the questions given within time given iv T walks around and gives help to needy students v. T checks and discusses the questions with the students by asking students to give their answer and vi. T reason for their choice of answer vii.T explains why the option given is correct or wrong and reminds students to apply in real examnation reminds students to do correction CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i The students find out that the task is very difficult for them as only a few manage to get half of the question correctly ii Objectives not achieved FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i Give easier questions in future that may suit their ability.

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME 3 ELIT 1205 - 1245 DAY : DATE : MONDAY 14 JAN

TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Grammar TOPIC Wh - Question Words SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information 2.2. Process Information by; a. skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas. (ii) Scanning for details b. Extracting main ideas and supporting details L1, A(ii) Noting important details L2.B (x) acquiring a range of vocabulary

WEEK

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i differentiate the uses of each WH -Words ii apply them in real situation iii answer all the questions given successfully TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Printed Note, Work Sheets, Textbook

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes the topic on the blackboard ii. T asks the students to give WH - Words that they Know iii T asks some students to make questions form from the given wh-words PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T explains in details to language items taught ( WH - Words) ii. T gives examples on how to use the words and responds to questions iii T tells the students to refer to the examples in textbook (pg 3) iv T gives exercise to the students and tells what they will do Students complete the task with teacher's guide and monitoring v. T checks and does correction with the class vi. T tells the students to do their correction.

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding ii. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i Again, I face the same problem. All the students cannot remember anything about WH- Words ii Difficult to make them understand FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i I have to explains in detail and slowly in order to make sure that they can get something from the lesson

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 3 DEDIKASI 0825 - 0905 40 Minutes 3 ELIT 1205 - 1245 40 Minutes DAY : DATE : WEEK TUESDAY 15 JAN 3

THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


a. Introducing oneself L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L3. (viii) Writing a short letter to friend about ones hopes and ambitions, etc. b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information c. Talking about self, family and friends, interests, etc, and understand when others talk about themselves L2. (viii). Writing a short letter to a friend about ones hopes, interests, ambitions, etc L2.(v) Writing simple messages to friends and family members relating to the above functions

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION

PRESENTATION STAGES

NILAM - READING BOOKS AT LIBRARY

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME 3 ELIT 1045 - 1205 80 Minutes PEOPLE DAY : DATE : WEEK : 16 WEDNESDAY JAN 3

Grammar TOPIC Simple Present Tense SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information 2.2. Process Information by; a. skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas. (ii) Scanning for details b. Extracting main ideas and supporting details L1, A(ii) Noting important details L2.B (x) acquiring a range of vocabulary

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i use the language item correctly in spoken and written ii answer at least 50% of the questions given correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Printed Notes, Work Sheets, Textbook

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes a sentence on the blackboard and asks students whether the sentence is correct or not. ii. T introduces the topic that they will learn in this lesson

PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T tells the students to refer to textbook (pg 8) and read the notes given ii. T gives extra note and explains to the students iii T gives examples on how to use in oral and written language iv T shows example on types of questions asked in examination v. T tells the students to copy notes for future use vi. T tells the students to answer task (Task B & C - pg8) vii.T checks and does correction with the students viii.T reminds the students to do their correction CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T gives all important points taught in the lesson iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i I face the same problem with this class and objectives not achieved. Only a few manage to answer some of the questions correctly. Some even can't finish and only copy answer FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i be more patience and keep on find ways to help the very weak students

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC 3 ELIT 0705 - 0745 40 Minutes PEOPLE Grammar DAY : DATE : WEEK : 18 FRIDAY JAN 3

Simple Present Tense SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information 2.2. Process Information by; a. skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas. (ii) Scanning for details b. Extracting main ideas and supporting details L1, A(ii) Noting important details L2.B (x) acquiring a range of vocabulary

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to apply what they had learnt in the previous lesson in completing this exercise i answer at least 50% of the questions correctly ii TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Work Sheet, Printed Notes

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T gives examples or sample questions to the students and reminds the students ii. T tells clearly what the students will do in this lesson

PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T does quick revision on what they had learnt in previous lesson ii. T distributes exercise (Work Sheet) to the students and explains what they will do Students answer the tasks given ( Actual Exam Questions) individually and limited guide iii T walks around to help weak students iv T checks and does correction with the class by asking the students to give their answer v. T explains and shows why the answer is right or wrong vi. T tells students to do their correction

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding ii. T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i I found out that it is not easy to teach this group of students who have negative attitude

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i teach only one or two activities or objectives at a time so that they can follow the lesson smoothly

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC 3 ELIT 1205 - 1245 40 Minutes PEOPLE Grammar Adjectives DAY : DATE : WEEK 21 MONDAY JAN 4

SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information 2.2. Process Information by; a. skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas. (ii) Scanning for details b. Extracting main ideas and supporting details L1, A(ii) Noting important details L2.B (x) acquiring a range of vocabulary

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to state the types of adjectives that they had learnt before or know i answer the questions given correctly ii TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Text Book, Printed notes, Work sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes the words on the blackboard ii. T asks students to read out the words and explain their meaning iii T shows how to use the words in sentences vi. T introduces the objectives of the lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T writes the language item taught in this particular lesson ii. T tells the students to refer to textbook (pg 9) and read the notes given carefully iii T gives more notes and details and explains in depth plus ample examples iv T asks some students to lists down any language item taught that they know while teacher write on the blackboard v. T explains to the students and gives more examples vi. T tells the students to copy notes into their exercise book for future use

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (30 Minutes) i. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding ii. T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i faceing similar problem. Have to be patience and try to help them i some part of the objective is achieved FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i have to translate in BM most of the time in order to get the students understanding

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS 3 ELIT 1245 - 1325 40 Minutes People Grammar Adjectives L&S/R/W DAY : DATE : WEEK TUESDAY 22 JAN 4

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information 2.2. Process Information by; a. skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas. (ii) Scanning for details b. Extracting main ideas and supporting details L1, A(ii) Noting important details L2.B (x) acquiring a range of vocabulary

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i tell how adjectives are formed ii apply the uses of adjectives in their writing iii answer most of the questions given correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Printed notes, Work Sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes some of the adjectives on the board ii. T shows how they are used in sentences and writing iii T introduces the objectives of the lesson to the students PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T does quick revision on the language item taught ( Formation and uses) ii. T distributes an article to every students (pair work) and tells them what they should do. iii T Students complete the task in pair or individually iv T tells some pairs or students to give their answer v. T checks and does correction on their mistakes vi. T gives and explains the answer of every question given vii.T reminds students to do their correction

CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 ELIT TIME 1205 - 1325 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1: TOPIC Grammar: Adjectives SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
b. Taking part in conversations and discussions.

DAY : DATE : WEEK

WEDNESDAY 23 JAN 4

L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information 2.2. Process Information by; a. skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas. (ii) Scanning for details b. Extracting main ideas and supporting details L1, A(ii) Noting important details L2.B (x) acquiring a range of vocabulary

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to apply what they had learnt in the previous lessons i ii answer at least half of the questions given correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Work Sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T quickly discusses students' work (Homework) ii. T tells the objectives of the lesson and telling the students on what they will do in this lesson

PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T does quick revision on what the students had learnt in the previous lesson ii. T distributes another work sheet (Exam oriented questions) to every students and tells what to do Students answer the questions given within time given. iii T checks and discusses the answer by asking students to talk about their answer and asks reason for their choice iv T explains why the option given is correct or wrong v. T reminds the students to think before decide their answer and apply it in real examination vi. T reminds the students to do correction CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i After almost 1 month teaching them, most of the students still not change much in terms of attitudes. interests in English and abilities. Only 2 or 3 of them manage to answer half of the questions correctly FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i have to give more exam oriented questions to prepare them for PMR

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 ELIT TIME 0705 - 0745 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1: TOPIC Grammar SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information 2.2. Process Information by;

DAY : DATE : WEEK

25

FRIDAY JAN 4

a. skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas. (ii) Scanning for details b. Extracting main ideas and supporting details L1, A(ii) Noting important details L2.B (x) acquiring a range of vocabulary

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i recall and apply what they had learnt during the grammar lessons ii improve their score by answering at least half of the questions correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Work Sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T does quick revision with the students ii. T tells the objectives and what the students will do in this lesson

PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T gives grammar test related to the topics being taught ii. T distributes the work sheet and tell what they should do Students answer the questions given iii T walks around and monitors the students while they complete the task iv T discusses and checks the exercise with the class v. T shows why the option chosen is right or wrong vi. T reminds the students to do their correction

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T gives all important points taught in the lesson ii. T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i Only a few (3) students are able to get half of the questions correctly. The others are still very weak.

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i Provide more help to those weak students

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION i. T ii. T (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES i. T ii. T iii T iv T v. T vi. T CLOSING i. T ii. T REFLECTION: i

(70 Minutes)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1: TOPIC Grammar SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i recall and apply what they had learnt during the grammar lessons ii improve their score by answering at least half of the questions correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Work Sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T does quick revision with the students ii. T tells the objectives and what the students will do in this lesson

PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T gives grammar test related to the topics being taught ii. T distributes the work sheet and tell what they should do Students answer the questions given iii T walks around and monitors the students while they complete the task iv T discusses and checks the exercise with the class v. T shows why the option chosen is right or wrong vi. T reminds the students to do their correction

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T gives all important points taught in the lesson ii. T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i Only a few (3) students are able to get half of the questions correctly. The others are still very weak.

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i Provide more help to those weak students

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

ves

out them

ully

TUESDAY 2013

ves

guage.

WEDNESDAY 2013

ons. g of words g details.

5)

m slowly

FRIDAY

2013

t half of the

MONDAY 2013

Words

from the lesson

TUESDAY 2013

nilam

ves

WEDNESDAY 2013

t or not.

to

FRIDAY 2013

smoothly

MONDAY 2013

her write

TUESDAY 2013

WEDNESDAY 2013

sson

what to do

s reason

ion

ms of attitudes. tions correctly

FRIDAY 2013

ll very weak.

ll very weak.

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI TIME 0905 - 0945 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1 : They Touch Our Life TOPIC Talk about famous personalities SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK TUESDAY 08 JAN 2

a. Introducing oneself L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L3. (viii) Writing a short letter to friend about ones hopes and ambitions, etc. b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information c. Talking about self, family and friends, interests, etc, and understand when others talk about themselves L2. (viii). Writing a short letter to a friend about ones hopes, interests, ambitions, etc L2.(v) Writing simple messages to friends and family members relating to the above functions

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i talk orally on the topic studied in English ii give own suitable and appropriate ideas and opinion on the topic learnt iii respond to questions politely and appropriately TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Textbook (pg 1 - 2)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes some names of famous personalities in Malaysia ii. T asks oral questions related to the names given to gauge how far the students know about them iii T introduces the topic and objectives of the lesson vi. T tells what the students will do in this particular lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T tells the students to refer to text book (pg1) and asks them to study the pictures carefully ii. T asks oral questions related to information on the given pictures iii T expects students to be able to give correct respond iv T gives details of the persons shown in the pictures v. T gives important aspects that are used to talk about the famous personality vi. T gives tasks: Task: get details of their friend sitting next to them vi. T asks students to talk about their friend using the details given earlier vii.T monitors and checks their mistakes and also corrects them CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i It is difficult to get most of the students in weak class to understand. ii Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i Give minimum questions to weak students ii Sometimes have to explain in their mother tongue to get them understand

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS 3 DEDIKASI TIME 1045 - 1125 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1 : They Touch Our Life TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK WEDNESDAY 09 JAN 2

a. Introducing oneself L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L3. (viii) Writing a short letter to friend about ones hopes and ambitions, etc. b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information c. Talking about self, family and friends, interests, etc, and understand when others talk about themselves L2. (viii). Writing a short letter to a friend about ones hopes, interests, ambitions, etc L2.(v) Writing simple messages to friends and family members relating to the above functions

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i complete the tasks given related to the topic taught ii answer at least 50% of the queastions given correctly(weak students) TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Textbook, Work Sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T revises what they had learnt in the previous lesson ii. T asks some students to tell in their own words what they had learnt in the last lesson iii T introduces the objectives of the lesson iv T tells them to prepare for the following activities PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T tells the students what they are going to do in this lesson ii. T explains the activities of the day in detail iii T distributes the handout (Work sheet) to every students. iv T tells the students that a text will be read aloud and they should listen carefully v. T tells students to jot down important details and try to answer the questions given vi. T makes sure students complete their task while listening vi. T reread the text and tells the students to double check their answer vii.T gets students (choose randomly) to answer the questions given earlier viii.T checks and corrects students task CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding ii. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i The main problem for this class is understanding what they are learning and English language. ii Only a few could give the correct answer to some of the questions FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i Sometimes have to explain in their mother tongue to get them understand ii Ask the students to copy the answer as model for them to follow

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS 3 DEDIKASI TIME 0745 - 0825 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1 : They Touch Our Life TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
2.1. Obtain ibformation for different purposes by i. Listening to and understanding a variety of texts of suitable length ii. Reading materials such as articles silently and aloud with understanding 2.2. Process information by i. Scanning and Skimming for specific information (details) and ideas ii. Extracting main ideas and supporting details iii. Following sequence of ideas, predicting outcomes iv. Getting meaning of unfamiliar words based on context and using dictionary.

DAY : DATE : WEEK

THURSDAY 10 JAN 2

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i identify main ideas and supporting ideas from the texts read/heard ii talk/explain what the text read/heard is about in own words iii answer at least 50% of the queastions given correctly(weak students) TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Text Book (pg 4 - 6), Printed note

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T explains what they had learnt in previous lesson ii. T tells the objectives and focus skills of the lesson iii T destributes notes on tips in answering comprehension questions PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T introduces reading skills and gives some tips on how to answer comprehension questions. ii. T explains how to look for main ideas/details, supporting details and looking for meaning of words iii T tells students to read an article on MERCY Malaysia and spot main ideas and supporting details. iv T shows how to identify main and supporting details in the text v. T shows how to guess the meaning of words based on context. vi. T tells the students to reread the article and answer the questions given (Task A & B - pg5) vii.T monitors the students while they complete the tasks. viii.T checks and corrects the questions with the class. ix. T gives homework ( Task C & D - pg 6) CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding ii. T gives all important points taught in the lesson iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i still have the same problem with this group of students ii difficult to get them understand and follow the lesson though I have been teaching them slowly FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i Sometimes have to explain in their mother tongue to get them understand ii Give minimum questions to weak students

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI DAY : FRIDAY

TIME 1045 - 1205 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1 : They Touch Our Life TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
2.1. Obtain ibformation for different purposes by i. Listening to and understanding a variety of texts of suitable length ii. Reading materials such as articles silently and aloud with understanding 2.2. Process information by i. Scanning and Skimming for specific information (details) and ideas ii. Extracting main ideas and supporting details iii. Following sequence of ideas, predicting outcomes iv. Getting meaning of unfamiliar words based on context and using dictionary.

DATE :

11

JAN

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to identify main points use to answer the questions i answer at least half of the questions given correctly ii TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Work sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T tells the students what they are going to do in this lesson ii. T reminds the students to complete the task carefully

PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T does quick revision on how to answer comprehension questions in examination (PKS & PMR) ii. T gives another sets of Examination like questions and tells what they will do iii T Students answer the questions given within time given iv T walks around and gives help to needy students v. T checks and discusses the questions with the students by asking students to give their answer and vi. T reason for their choice of answer vii.T explains why the option given is correct or wrong and reminds students to apply in real examnation reminds students to do correction CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i The students find out that the task is very difficult for them as only a few manage to get half of the question correctly ii Objectives not achieved FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i Give easier questions in future that may suit their ability.

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME 3 DEDIKASI 1045 - 1125 DAY : DATE : WEDNESDAY 16 JAN

TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1 : They Touch Our Life TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information 2.2. Process Information by; a. skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas. (ii) Scanning for details b. Extracting main ideas and supporting details L1, A(ii) Noting important details L2.B (x) acquiring a range of vocabulary

WEEK

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i differentiate the uses of each WH -Words ii apply them in real situation iii answer all the questions given successfully TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Printed Note, Work Sheets, Textbook

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes the topic on the blackboard ii. T asks the students to give WH - Words that they Know iii T asks some students to make questions form from the given wh-words PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T explains in details to language items taught ( WH - Words) ii. T gives examples on how to use the words and responds to questions iii T tells the students to refer to the examples in textbook (pg 3) iv T gives exercise to the students and tells what they will do Students complete the task with teacher's guide and monitoring v. T checks and does correction with the class vi. T tells the students to do their correction.

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding ii. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i Again, I face the same problem. All the students cannot remember anything about WH- Words ii Difficult to make them understand FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i I have to explains in detail and slowly in order to make sure that they can get something from the lesson

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 3 DEDIKASI 0745 - 0825 40 Minutes DAY : DATE : WEEK : THURSDAY 17 JAN 3

PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1 : They Touch Our Life TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information 2.2. Process Information by; a. skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas. (ii) Scanning for details b. Extracting main ideas and supporting details L1, A(ii) Noting important details L2.B (x) acquiring a range of vocabulary

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i use the language item correctly in spoken and written ii answer at least 50% of the questions given correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Printed Notes, Work Sheets, Textbook

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes a sentence on the blackboard and asks students whether the sentence is correct or not. ii. T introduces the topic that they will learn in this lesson

PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T tells the students to refer to textbook (pg 8) and read the notes given ii. T gives extra note and explains to the students iii T gives examples on how to use in oral and written language iv T shows example on types of questions asked in examination v. T tells the students to copy notes for future use vi. T tells the students to answer task (Task B & C - pg8) vii.T checks and does correction with the students viii.T reminds the students to do their correction CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T gives all important points taught in the lesson iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i I face the same problem with this class and objectives not achieved. Only a few manage to answer some of the questions correctly. Some even can't finish and only copy answer FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i be more patience and keep on find ways to help the very weak students

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME 3 DEDIKASI 1045 - 1205 80 Minutes PEOPLE DAY : DATE : WEEK : 18 FRIDAY JAN 3

Chapter 1 : They Touch Our Life TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information 2.2. Process Information by; a. skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas. (ii) Scanning for details b. Extracting main ideas and supporting details L1, A(ii) Noting important details L2.B (x) acquiring a range of vocabulary

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to apply what they had learnt in the previous lesson in completing this exercise i answer at least 50% of the questions correctly ii TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Work Sheet, Printed Notes

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T gives examples or sample questions to the students and reminds the students ii. T tells clearly what the students will do in this lesson

PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T discusses and checks students' homework. I T does quick revision on how to use the language items taught in orevious lesson I T distributes exercise (Work Sheet) to the students and explains what they will do I T Students answer the tasks given ( Actual Exam Questions) individually and limited guide I T walks around to help weak students I T checks and does correction with the class by asking the students to give their answer I T explains and shows why the answer is right or wrong I T tells students to do their correction CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding ii. T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i I found out that it is not easy to teach this group of students who have negative attitude

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i teach only one or two activities or objectives at a time so that they can follow the lesson smoothly

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC 3 DEDIKASI 0825 - 0905 40 Minutes PEOPLE Chapter 1 : They Touch Our Life DAY : DATE : WEEK TUESDAY 22 JAN 4

SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information 2.2. Process Information by; a. skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas. (ii) Scanning for details b. Extracting main ideas and supporting details L1, A(ii) Noting important details L2.B (x) acquiring a range of vocabulary

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to state the types of adjectives that they had learnt before or know i answer the questions given correctly ii TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Text Book, Printed notes, Work sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes the words on the blackboard ii. T asks students to read out the words and explain their meaning iii T shows how to use the words in sentences vi. T introduces the objectives of the lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T writes the language item taught in this particular lesson ii. T tells the students to refer to textbook (pg 9) and read the notes given carefully iii T gives more notes and details and explains in depth plus ample examples iv T asks some students to lists down any language item taught that they know while teacher write on the blackboard v. T explains to the students and gives more examples vi. T tells the students to copy notes into their exercise book for future use

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (30 Minutes) i. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding ii. T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i faceing similar problem. Have to be patience and try to help them i some part of the objective is achieved FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i have to translate in BM most of the time in order to get the students understanding

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC 3 DEDIKASI 1045 - 1125 40 Minutes PEOPLE Chapter 1 : They Touch Our Life DAY : DATE : WEEK 23 WEDNESDAY JAN 4

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information 2.2. Process Information by; a. skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas. (ii) Scanning for details b. Extracting main ideas and supporting details L1, A(ii) Noting important details L2.B (x) acquiring a range of vocabulary

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i tell how adjectives are formed ii apply the uses of adjectives in their writing iii answer most of the questions given correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Printed notes, Work Sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes some of the adjectives on the board ii. T shows how they are used in sentences and writing iii T introduces the objectives of the lesson to the students PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T does quick revision on the language item taught ( Formation and uses) ii. T distributes an article to every students (pair work) and tells them what they should do. iii T Students complete the task in pair or individually iv T tells some pairs or students to give their answer v. T checks and does correction on their mistakes vi. T gives and explains the answer of every question given vii.T reminds students to do their correction

CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS 3 DEDIKASI 0745 - 0825 40 Minutes DAY : DATE : WEEK THURSDAY 24 JAN 4

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI TIME TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
b. Taking part in conversations and discussions.

DAY : DATE : WEEK

25

FRIDAY JAN 4

L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information 2.2. Process Information by; a. skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas. (ii) Scanning for details b. Extracting main ideas and supporting details L1, A(ii) Noting important details L2.B (x) acquiring a range of vocabulary

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to apply what they had learnt in the previous lessons i ii answer at least half of the questions given correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Work Sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T quickly discusses students' work (Homework) ii. T tells the objectives of the lesson and telling the students on what they will do in this lesson

PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T does quick revision on what the students had learnt in the previous lesson ii. T distributes another work sheet (Exam oriented questions) to every students and tells what to do Students answer the questions given within time given. iii T checks and discusses the answer by asking students to talk about their answer and asks reason for their choice iv T explains why the option given is correct or wrong v. T reminds the students to think before decide their answer and apply it in real examination vi. T reminds the students to do correction CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i After almost 1 month teaching them, most of the students still not change much in terms of attitudes. interests in English and abilities. Only 2 or 3 of them manage to answer half of the questions correctly FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i have to give more exam oriented questions to prepare them for PMR

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI TIME TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i ii TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Work Sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION i. T ii. T (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES i. T ii. T iii T iv T v. T vi. T CLOSING i. T ii. T REFLECTION: i

(70 Minutes)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 80 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI TIME TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK 15 TUESDAY JAN 3

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK 15 TUESDAY JAN 3

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

TUESDAY 2013

ves

out them

ully

WEDNESDAY 2013

ves

guage.

THURSDAY 2013

ons. g of words g details.

5)

tells the students to reread the article and answer the questions given (Task A & B - pg5) monitors the students while they complete the tasks. checks and corrects the questions with the class. gives homework ( Task C & D - pg 6)

m slowly

FRIDAY

2013

t half of the

Tuesday - NILAM

WEDNESDAY 2013

Words

from the lesson

THURSDAY 2013

t or not.

to

FRIDAY 2013

smoothly

TUESDAY 2013

her write

WEDNESDAY 2013

THURSDAY 2013

cuti

FRIDAY 2013

sson

what to do

s reason

ion

ms of attitudes. tions correctly

TUESDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

n (Task A & B - pg5)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 2 ARIF TIME 1245 - 1325 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1: What People Do TOPIC Talk about Occupations SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK MONDAY 07 JAN 2

a. Introducing oneself L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L3. (viii) Writing a short letter to friend about ones hopes and ambitions, etc. b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information c. Talking about self, family and friends, interests, etc, and understand when others talk about themselves L2. (viii). Writing a short letter to a friend about ones hopes, interests, ambitions, etc L2.(v) Writing simple messages to friends and family members relating to the above functions

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i talk / describe orally on jobs of different types of occupations ii talk about heir daily routines to others iii list down their own weekly planning (Routines) TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Text book, Printed note

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T shows pictures of different types of occupations ii. T tells students to name the type of occupation shown and talk briefly on it iii T tells the what they will learn in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T tells the students to refer to text book (pg1) and asks them to study the pictures carefully ii. T asks oral questions related to information on the given pictures iii T tells the students to read the description of daily routines (pg 2) iv T tells students to focus on language structure and sentence structure used v. T shows important aspects need to be in when talking about daily routines vi. T gives tasks: Task: List down their own daily routines vi. T asks students to talk about their own daily routines listed earlier vii.T monitors and checks their mistakes and also corrects them viii.T gives Homework : Describe One Daily Routines as a student. ( Refer to text book pg 2) CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T gives all important points taught in the lesson iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i Since this is a good class and most of the students can use and understand English language well, I face minimum problems. i Students respond to every questions and complete every task FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i change attitude of some so that they will pay more attention in future ii give more challenging tasks and make sure students focus in class in future

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS 2 ARIF TIME 1045 - 1205 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1 : What People Do TOPIC Talking about occupations SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK TUESDAY 08 JAN 2

a. Introducing oneself L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L3. (viii) Writing a short letter to friend about ones hopes and ambitions, etc. b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information c. Talking about self, family and friends, interests, etc, and understand when others talk about themselves L2. (viii). Writing a short letter to a friend about ones hopes, interests, ambitions, etc L2.(v) Writing simple messages to friends and family members relating to the above functions

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i talk about other people routines ii describe other people's job and daily routines TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Text Book (page 2 - 3)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T revises what they had learnt in the previous lesson ii. T tells what they will learn in this lesson and reminds them to pay attention iii T writes the topic on the blackboard PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T tells the students to refer to page 2 & 3 of their textbook ii. T asks them to read and pay attention on sentence structure used to describe other's daily routines iii T iv T v. T vi. T vii.T viii.T CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson
Students read the text and talk orally on it asks oral questions based on the texts read shows and explains sentence structure and language items used when describing other's daily routines gives examples on how to describe people's daily routines gives task: Pair work - Students ask their friends next to them about their daily routines tells the students to list down their friend's daily routine and get some to talk in front gives homework : Write description of their friend's daily routines (Refer to page 2 & 3 )

REFLECTION: i 100% of the students involve actively in class discussion and activities. They also complete every task given. FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i give more hand-on activities and keep on monitor them to make sure they follow and understand the lesson.

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS 2 ARIF TIME 0905 - 1025 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes People THEME Chapter 1: What People Do? TOPIC Reading Comprehension SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
2.1. Obtain ibformation for different purposes by i. Listening to and understanding a variety of texts of suitable length ii. Reading materials such as articles silently and aloud with understanding 2.2. Process information by i. Scanning and Skimming for specific information (details) and ideas ii. Extracting main ideas and supporting details iii. Following sequence of ideas, predicting outcomes iv. Getting meaning of unfamiliar words based on context and using dictionary.

DAY : DATE : WEEK

11

FRIDAY JAN 2

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i identify main and supporting ideas/details from the text read ii answer all the questions given correctly iii apply what they had learnt in this lesson in real examination in future TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Text Book (pg 4 - 6)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks oral questions related to what they know on comprehension skills ii. T tells the objectives of the lesson and reminds them on what they are going to learn in this lesson iii T tells students how comprehension questions are set in real examination PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T introduces reading skills and gives some tips on how to answer comprehension questions. ii. T explains how to look for main ideas/details, supporting details and looking for meaning of words iii T tells students to read an article and spot main ideas and supporting details. iv T shows how to identify main and supporting details in the text v. T shows how to guess the meaning of words based on context. vi. T tells the students to reread the article and answer the questions given. vii.T monitors the students while they complete the tasks. viii.T checks and corrects the questions with the class. ix. T tells the students to complete the other task at home (Home Work) CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding ii. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i Lesson goes on smoothly and objectives achieved.

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i Keep on with more activities in future.

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 2 ARIF DAY : TUESDAY

TIME 1045 - 1205 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes People THEME Chapter 1 : What People Do? TOPIC Reading Comprehension SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
2.1. Obtain ibformation for different purposes by i. Listening to and understanding a variety of texts of suitable length ii. Reading materials such as articles silently and aloud with understanding 2.2. Process information by i. Scanning and Skimming for specific information (details) and ideas ii. Extracting main ideas and supporting details iii. Following sequence of ideas, predicting outcomes iv. Getting meaning of unfamiliar words based on context and using dictionary.

DATE : WEEK :

15

JAN 3

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i apply what they had learnt earlier in completing the task ii answer all the questions given correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Printed material (Work sheet)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T checks and discusses the homework given in the previous lesson ii. T reminds the students to do their correction (Wrong answers only) iii T introduces the objectives and tells what they will do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T does quick revision on how to answer comprehension questions in examination (PKS & PMR) ii. T gives another sets of Examination like questions and tells what they will do iii T iv T v. T
Students answer the questions given within time given walks around and gives help to needy students checks and discusses the questions with the students by asking students to give their answer and reason for their choice of answer explains why the option given is correct or wrong and reminds students to apply in real examnation

reminds students to do correction CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught ii. T summarizes the lesson. iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i lesson goes on smoothly ii 90% of the students answer all the questions correctly FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i Keep on with their achievement and make sure the students are given more challenging activities in future.

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME 2 ARIF 0905 - 1025 DAY : DATE : 25 FRIDAY JAN

TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1: What people do? TOPIC Grammar : Antonyms SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/ R/ W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

WEEK :

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i give the meaning related to the topic taught ii apply what they had learnt in their exercises iii answer all the questions correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Textbook, Printed Materials

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes words on the blackboard and asks the students to give opposite meaning ii. T briefly tells the students what it is all about in order to recall their memory iii T introduces the objectives of the lesson and tells them what they are going to do. PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T explains in details to language items taught ( Antonyms - pg 6 ) ii. T gives examples on how to use the words and responds to questions iii T tells the students to refer to the examples in textbook ( pg 6 ) iv T gives exercise to the students and tells what they will do Students complete the task with teacher's guide and monitoring v. T checks and does correction with the class vi. T gives more exercise related to language items taught vii.T discusses and checks the exercise with the students viii.T reminds the students to do their correction CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught ii. T summarizes the lesson. iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i 100% of the students are able to answer all the questions correctly ii it is easier to achieve the objectives of the lesson when teaching good class FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i be more prepared and give more challenging exercises to suit their abilities

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 2 ARIF 1045 - 1205 80 Minutes DAY : DATE : WEEK TUESDAY 28 JAN 4

PEOPLE THEME Chapter 1: What People Do? TOPIC Grammar : The Simple Present Tense SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to orally telling what the topic is about i recall what they had learnt in the past and apply in the real exercises and examinations ii answer all the given questions correctly iii TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Printed Note, Work Sheets, Textbook

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes a sentence on the blackboard and asks students whether the sentence is correct or not. ii. T introduces the topic that they will learn in this lesson

PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T tells the students to refer to textbook (Simple Present Tense :pg8) and read the notes given ii. T gives extra note and explains to the students iii T gives examples on how to use in oral and written language iv T shows example on types of questions asked in examination v. T tells the students to copy the notes for future reference vi. T tells the students to complete the exercises given vii.T discusses and checks by telling why the option chosen is right or wrong viii.T reminds the students to do their correction CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T gives all important points taught in the lesson iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i Most of the students remember this grammartical category and this makes my lesson easier and the students are able to follow the lesson and answer most of the questions correctly FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i remind the students to do correction everytimes and apply what they had learnt in future

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME 2 ARIF 0905 - 1025 80 Minutes PEOPLE DAY : DATE : WEEK 01 FRIDAY FEB 4

Chapter 1: What People Do? TOPIC Grammar: Wh - Words SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i talk about the topic that the learnt in this lesson ii apply what they learnt here in completing the tasks in future iii answer all the questions correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Text Book, Printed material (work sheet)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes the Wh-words on the blackboard and asks students to tell/talk about their uses ii. T goes through the words briefly to recall their memories iii T introduces the objectives of the lesson and telling them what they are going to do PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T writes the language item taught in this particular lesson ( Wh-Words - pg 9 ) ii. T tells the students to refer to textbook (pg 9 ) and read the notes given carefully iii T gives more notes and details and explains in depth plus ample examples iv T asks some students to lists down any language item taught that they know while teacher write on the blackboard v. T explains to the students and gives more examples vi. T tells the students to copy notes into their exercise book for future use vii.T gives exercise and tells what / how to complete the task viii.T checks and discusses the exercise with the students CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION: i 100% of the students are able to answer all the questions correctly ii the objectives of the lesson are achieved FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i keep on with the planning and make sure the students improve from time to time

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC 2 ARIF DAY : DATE : WEEK :

SUB-TOPIC SKILLS R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i ii TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION i. T ii. T (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T does quick revision on what the students had learnt in the previous lesson ii. T iii T iv T v. T vi. T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) i. T ii. T REFLECTION: (5 - 7 Minutes)

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC 3 DEDIKASI 40 Minutes DAY : DATE : WEEK :

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

I I I

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) T T T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 2 ARIF TIME 0905 - 1025 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC L&S/W SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : 11 WEEK : FRIDAY JAN 2

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i ii TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Text book (pg7), work sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION i. T ii. T iii T (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES i. T ii. T iii T iv T v. T vi. T vii.T viii.T ix. T CLOSING i. T ii. T iii T REFLECTION: i ii

(70 Minutes)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S) i keep up with the teaching activities and always make sure the students follow the lesson and maintaince their attitude

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK 21 MONDAY JAN 4

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK TUESDAY 22 JAN 4

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK 23 WEDNESDAY JAN 4

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK 25 FRIDAY JAN 4

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK JAN 3

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI 3 ELIT TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK 15 TUESDAY JAN 3

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

PRESENTATION STAGES

(5 - 7 Minutes)

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES)

(5 - 7 Minutes)

REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

ves

ully

uage well,

TUESDAY 2013

ves

ete every

derstand the

FRIDAY 2013

this lesson

ons. g of words

TUESDAY

2013

activities in future.
MONDAY NILAM PBS

FRIDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

t or not.

given

asier tly

FRIDAY 2013

her write

FRIDAY 2013

and maintaince

MONDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

WEDNESDAY 2013

FRIDAY 2013

2013

TUESDAY 2013

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE :

MONDAY 02 SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS DAY : MONDAY

TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DATE :

02

SEPT

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY

2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

1.1 a. Introducing oneself L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L3. (viii) Writing a short letter to friend about ones hopes and ambitions, etc. b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information (iii). Responding appropriately to questions by stating, refuting and giving details L2. (vi). Participating in teacher-guide of class discussions on topic of interest by agreeing or disagreeing to others opinions L3. (x). Reading newspaper articles, etc and discussing points of interest with friends

c. Talking about self, family and friends, interests, past events, feelings, etc, and understand when others talk about themselve L2. (viii). Writing a short letter to a friend about ones hopes, interests, ambitions, etc d. Exchanging ideas, information and opinions on topics of interest L1. (ii) Asking questions politely to get information (iii) Responding appropriately to questions by stating, refuting and giving details L2. (vii). Seeking clarification on what was said and responding appropriately 1.2. Take part in social interaction by a. carrying out a variety of language functions; L1. (i) Expressing congratulations and responding appropriately. (ii) Giving compliments and responding appropriately (iv) Giving oral and written instruction to do something L2.(v) Writing simple messages to friends and family members relating to the above functions L3. (viii) Writing simple letters to friends and relatives b. Participating in conversations and discussions ; L2. (vi) Participating in a conversation by agreeing or disagreeing politely with other c. making plans and arrangements L2. (vii). Making decisions with others to do something. 1.3. Obtain goods and services by making enquires and ordering goods and services L1. (i) Enquiring as to what a facility has. (ii) Understanding the types of services available as posted outside the facility. L2. (iii) Making further enquires as to details about the services and the services offered.. (iv) Responding appropriately on receiving the information L3. (v) Filling out an application form.

agreeing or disagreeing to others opinions

understand when others talk about themselves

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 ELIT TIME 1205 - 1245 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Descriptive Essay TOPIC Describing People SUB-TOPIC SKILLS WRITING LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
2.3. Present Information to different audiences by: i. Writing directions, instructions, articles, etc ii. Giving instructions, describing, etc..orally iii. Apply process writing skills iv. Writing using correct format/convention v. Summarize a note or text vi. Writing using correct language structure vii. Expanding notes or details

MONDAY DAY : DATE : 28 JAN WEEK : 5

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i talk orally on how to describe people in essay ii recall what they had learnt in the past lessons iii involve actively in class discussion TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Handout (notes)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes the topic or genre that the students will learn in this lesson ii. T asks oral questions related to the genre in order to refresh students' memory iii T introduces the objectives of the lesson and tells students what they are goin go do in this lesson. PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T introduces the genre or essay type that students will learn in this particula lesson ii. T introduces and explains in detail the details related to the genre taught iii T shows inportant aspects related to writing essay that students should know iv T explains the aspects plus examples v. T shows sample essay and brieftly explains the aspects taught earlier such as the format, paragraphing, punctuation and others vi. T tells students to copy the notes for future use

CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS 3 ELIT TIME 1205 - 1325 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Descriptive Essay TOPIC Describing People SUB-TOPIC SKILLS WRITING LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
2.3. Present Information to different audiences by: i. Writing directions, instructions, articles, etc ii. Giving instructions, describing, etc..orally iii. Apply process writing skills iv. Writing using correct format/convention v. Summarize a note or text vi. Writing using correct language structure vii. Expanding notes or details

TUESDAY DAY : DATE : 29 JAN WEEK : 5

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to talk about the language structure and sentence structure used to describe people i apply the sentence structures learnt in their writing ii write introduction and closing using correct and appropriate sentence structures iii TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Handout (notes)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks oral questions related to what they had learnt in the previous lesson. ii. T introduces the objectives of the lesson. iii T tells wha the students will do in this lesson and reminds them to pay attention. PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T revises what students had learnt in previous lesson ii. T shows the model essay again and quickly points out the items taught earlier iii T shows on the blackboard how to start the essay using the appropriate sentence structure iv T practices with the students writing the sentence structure as used in introduction, body & closing v. T Class Practice: Write the Introduction & Closing using the sentence structure taught earlier vi. T monitors and helps students with their task vii.T Students complete the task and may continue as homework

CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS 3 ELIT TIME 1205 - 1325 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Descriptive Essay TOPIC Describing People SUB-TOPIC SKILLS WRITING LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
2.3. Present Information to different audiences by: i. Writing directions, instructions, articles, etc ii. Giving instructions, describing, etc..orally iii. Apply process writing skills iv. Writing using correct format/convention v. Summarize a note or text vi. Writing using correct language structure vii. Expanding notes or details

DAY : DATE : WEEK :

WEDNESDAY 30 JAN 5

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to differentiate the format for descriptive essay and other genres i identify they language items used to describe people ii use suitable structure or format and language items in their writing. iii TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Handout (notes)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T chesks and explains students' previous tasks ii. T reminds students to do correction iii T introduces the objectives and tells what the students will do in this lesson. PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T briefly explains what the students had learnt in previous lesson ii. T shows/introduces the format or layout (sample essay) of the essay taught and explains in details iii T shows on the blackboard how to write the layout iv T introduces and explains the language items used for the particular genre v. T shows how to form sentences using the language items taught vi. T shows model essay (real essay) and points out the format and language items found in essay. vii.T gives tasks to the students: Task 1: State the format/layout & Task 2: Identify the language items viii.T checks and does correction with students (If time premitted) CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding ii. T summarizes the lesson. iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 ELIT DAY : FRIDAY

TIME 0705 - 0745 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Descriptive Essay TOPIC Describing People SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
2.3. Present Information to different audiences by: i. Writing directions, instructions, articles, etc ii. Giving instructions, describing, etc..orally iii. Apply process writing skills iv. Writing using correct format/convention v. Summarize a note or text vi. Writing using correct language structure vii. Expanding notes or details

DATE :

01

FEB

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to recall and apply what they had learnt during the past lessons in their writing i write short, simple essay individually ii TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Handout (notes)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T revises all that the students had learnt throughout the week ii. T tells students what they will do in this lesson

PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T reminds the students to refer all that had been taught in the previous lessons ii. T gives the actual PMR Question related to the genre taught and tells what they will do iii T tells students to write the essay individually with teacher's guide Students write their essay individually or may discuss with the friend next to them iv T walks around and monitors or helps the students with problems v. T allows students to complete the writing at home (Homework) if they can't finish it vi. T reminds the students to hand-in their essay in the next lesson.

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T summarizes the lesson. I T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME 2 ARIF 0905 - 1025 DAY : DATE : FRIDAY

TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Handout (notes)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T ii. T iii T iv T PRESENTATION STAGES I T revises what students had learnt in previous lesson I T shows the model essay again and quickly points out the items taught earlier I T shows on the blackboard how to start the essay using the appropriate sentence structure I T practices with the students writing the sentence structure as used in introduction, body & closing I T gives the actual PMR Question related to the genre taught and tells what they will do I T Students write their essay individually or may discuss with the friend next to them I T walks around and monitors or helps the students with problems I T allows students to complete the writing at home (Homework) if they can't finish it I T reminds the students to hand-in their essay in the next lesson. CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Handout (notes)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T ii. T iii T iv T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Handout (notes)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T ii. T iii T iv T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Handout (notes)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T ii. T iii T iv T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013
Asking questions politely to get information Responding appropriately to questions by stating, refuting and giving details Participating in T-guide discussions on topic of interest by agreeing or disagreeing to opinions Reading newspaper articles, etc and discussing points of interest with friends

his lesson.

a. Writing directions, instructions, recounts, announcements using appropriate formats and conventions L2. (xvii). Writing recounts, ect (xviii). Writing descriptions, etc (xix) Punctuating meaningfully using capital letters, commas, full stops, question marks L3: (xix) Writing a simple report complete with tables and/or pie-charts. b. Giving instructions, describing, narrating orally; L1: (xiv) Recounting orally what events took place c. Composing, revising and editing drafts, and checking accuracy of spelling, punctuation and grammar L1: (xvi) taking spelling and dictation of seen texts L2: (xix) Punctuating meaningfully using appropriate punctuations L3: (xx) Applying process writing skills by a. Discussing topic with teacher and peers and jotting down ideas b. Writing out an outline c. Writing paragraphs with a clear focus d. Revising and editing the draft until it is clear and flow well e. Proof-reading the draft to eliminate mistakes f. Writing the final draft of the text

TUESDAY 2013

ure y & closing arlier

WEDNESDAY 2013

s in details

essay. uage items

FRIDAY

2013

FRIDAY 2013

ure y & closing

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

agreeing to opinions

te formats and conventions

punctuation and grammar

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 2 ARIF TIME 1245 - 1325 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: MONDAY DAY : DATE : 28 JAN WEEK : 5

2.3. Presenting Information to different audiences by: i. Participating in a conversation and discussion ii. Writing recounts, descriptive essays, directions, instructions, stories, etc with correct fomat and structure iii. Giving directions, instructions and narrating or recount orally the events iv. Composing, revising, editing to correcting punctuation, spelling, etc v. Applying process writing skills vi. Writing simple essay with correct format, sentence structure and grammatically correct vii. Expanding notes or summarizing notes and texts

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T introduces the genre or essay type that students will learn in this particula lesson ii. T introduces and explains in detail the details related to the genre taught iii T shows inportant aspects related to writing essay that students should know iv T explains the aspects plus examples v. T shows sample essay and brieftly explains the aspects taught earlier such as the format, paragraphing, punctuation and others vi. T tells students to copy the notes for future use

I I I

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) T T T REFLECTION:

(5 - 7 Minutes)

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS 2 ARIF TIME TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : TUESDAY 29 JAN

2.3. Presenting Information to different audiences by: i. Participating in a conversation and discussion ii. Writing recounts, descriptive essays, directions, instructions, stories, etc with correct fomat and structure iii. Giving directions, instructions and narrating or recount orally the events iv. Composing, revising, editing to correcting punctuation, spelling, etc v. Applying process writing skills vi. Writing simple essay with correct format, sentence structure and grammatically correct vii. Expanding notes or summarizing notes and texts

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T briefly explains what the students had learnt in previous lesson I T shows/introduces the format or layout (sample essay) of the essay taught and explains in details I T shows on the blackboard how to write the layout I T introduces and explains the language items used for the particular genre I T shows how to form sentences using the language items taught I T shows model essay (real essay) and points out the format and language items found in essay. I T gives tasks to the students: Task 1: State the format/layout & Task 2: Identify the language items I T checks and does correction with students (If time premitted) CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) T T T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

I I I

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS 2 ARIF TIME 0905 - 1025 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE :

01

FRIDAY FEB

2.3. Presenting Information to different audiences by: i. Participating in a conversation and discussion ii. Writing recounts, descriptive essays, directions, instructions, stories, etc with correct fomat and structure iii. Giving directions, instructions and narrating or recount orally the events iv. Composing, revising, editing to correcting punctuation, spelling, etc v. Applying process writing skills vi. Writing simple essay with correct format, sentence structure and grammatically correct vii. Expanding notes or summarizing notes and texts

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T revises what students had learnt in previous lesson I T shows the model essay again and quickly points out the items taught earlier I T shows on the blackboard how to start the essay using the appropriate sentence structure I T practices with the students writing the sentence structure as used in introduction, body & closing I T gives the actual PMR Question related to the genre taught and tells what they will do I T Students write their essay individually or may discuss with the friend next to them walks around and monitors or helps the students with problems allows students to complete the writing at home (Homework) if they can't finish it reminds the students to hand-in their essay in the next lesson. CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS DAY : MONDAY

TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DATE :

02

SEPT

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I I I T T T

CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME 2 ARIF 0905 - 1025 DAY : DATE : FRIDAY

TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

cture

1.1. Make friends and keep relationships by b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information (iii). Responding appropriately to questions by stating, refuting and giving details L2. (vi). Participating in T-guide discussions on topic of interest by agreeing or disagreeing to opinions L3. (x). Reading newspaper articles, etc and discussing points of interest with friends 1.2. Take part in social interaction by b. Participating in conversations and discussions ; L2. (vi) Participating in a conversation by agreeing or disagreeing politely with other 2.3. Presenting Information to different audience by; a. Writing directions, instructions, recounts, announcements using appropriate formats and conventions L2. (xvii). Writing recounts, ect (xviii). Writing descriptions, etc (xix) Punctuating meaningfully using capital letters, commas, full stops, question marks L3: (xix) Writing a simple report complete with tables and/or pie-charts. b. Giving instructions, describing, narrating orally; L1: (xiv) Recounting orally what events took place c. Composing, revising and editing drafts, and checking accuracy of spelling, punctuation and grammar L1: (xvi) taking spelling and dictation of seen texts L2: (xix) Punctuating meaningfully using appropriate punctuations L3: (xx) Applying process writing skills by a. Discussing topic with teacher and peers and jotting down ideas b. Writing out an outline c. Writing paragraphs with a clear focus d. Revising and editing the draft until it is clear and flow well e. Proof-reading the draft to eliminate mistakes f. Writing the final draft of the text

TUESDAY 2013

cture

s in details

essay. uage items

FRIDAY 2013

cture

ure y & closing

revises what students had learnt in previous lesson shows the model essay again and quickly points out the items taught earlier shows on the blackboard how to start the essay using the appropriate sentence structure practices with the students writing the sentence structure as used in introduction, body & closing Class Practice: Write the Introduction & Closing using the sentence structure taught earlier monitors and helps students with their task Students complete the task and may continue as homework

MONDAY

2013

FRIDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

g or disagreeing to opinions

te formats and conventions

punctuation and grammar

earlier sentence structure ntroduction, body & closing ructure taught earlier

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI TIME 0825 - 0905 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: TUESDAY DAY : DATE : 29 JAN WEEK : 5

2.3. Presenting Information to different audiences by: i. Participating in a conversation and discussion ii. Writing recounts, descriptive essays, directions, instructions, stories, etc with correct fomat and structure iii. Giving directions, instructions and narrating or recount orally the events iv. Composing, revising, editing to correcting punctuation, spelling, etc v. Applying process writing skills vi. Writing simple essay with correct format, sentence structure and grammatically correct vii. Expanding notes or summarizing notes and texts

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i talk orally on how to describe people in essay ii recall what they had learnt in the past lessons iii involve actively in class discussion TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Handout (notes)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes the topic or genre that the students will learn in this lesson ii. T asks oral questions related to the genre in order to refresh students' memory iii T introduces the objectives of the lesson and tells students what they are goin go do in this lesson. PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T introduces the genre or essay type that students will learn in this particula lesson ii. T introduces and explains in detail the details related to the genre taught iii T shows inportant aspects related to writing essay that students should know iv T explains the aspects plus examples v. T shows sample essay and briefly explains the aspects taught earlier such as the format, paragraphing, punctuation and others vi. T tells students to copy the notes for future use

I I I

CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) T T T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS 3 DEDIKASI TIME 1045 - 1125 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEDNESDAY 30 JAN

2.3. Presenting Information to different audiences by: i. Participating in a conversation and discussion ii. Writing recounts, descriptive essays, directions, instructions, stories, etc with correct fomat and structure iii. Giving directions, instructions and narrating or recount orally the events iv. Composing, revising, editing to correcting punctuation, spelling, etc v. Applying process writing skills vi. Writing simple essay with correct format, sentence structure and grammatically correct vii. Expanding notes or summarizing notes and texts

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to talk about the language structure and sentence structure used to describe people i apply the sentence structures learnt in their writing ii write introduction and closing using correct and appropriate sentence structures iii TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Handout (notes)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks oral questions related to what they had learnt in the previous lesson. ii. T introduces the objectives of the lesson. iii T tells wha the students will do in this lesson and reminds them to pay attention. PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) T briefly explains what the students had learnt in previous lesson T shows/introduces the format or layout (sample essay) of the essay taught and explains in details T shows on the blackboard how to write the layout T introduces and explains the language items used for the particular genre T shows how to form sentences using the language items taught T shows model essay (real essay) and points out the format and language items found in essay. T gives Homework : Task 1: State the format/layout & Task 2: Identify the language items T reminds the students to hand-in their work the following lesson CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) T T T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

I I I I I I I I

I I I

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS 3 DEDIKASI TIME 0745 - 0825 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE : WEEK :

THURSDAY 31 JAN 5

2.3. Presenting Information to different audiences by: i. Participating in a conversation and discussion ii. Writing recounts, descriptive essays, directions, instructions, stories, etc with correct fomat and structure iii. Giving directions, instructions and narrating or recount orally the events iv. Composing, revising, editing to correcting punctuation, spelling, etc v. Applying process writing skills vi. Writing simple essay with correct format, sentence structure and grammatically correct vii. Expanding notes or summarizing notes and texts

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to differentiate the format for descriptive essay and other genres i identify they language items used to describe people ii use suitable structure or format and language items in their writing. iii TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Handout (notes)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T chesks and explains students' previous tasks ii. T reminds students to do correction iii T introduces the objectives and tells what the students will do in this lesson. PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) T revises what students had learnt in previous lesson T shows the model essay again and quickly points out the items taught earlier T shows on the blackboard how to start the essay using the appropriate sentence structure T practices with the students writing the sentence structure as used in introduction, body & closing T Class Practice: Write the Introduction & Closing using the sentence structure taught earlier T monitors and helps students with their task Students complete the task and may continue as homework

I I I I I I

I I I

CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) T T T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI DAY : FRIDAY

TIME 1045 - 1205 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DATE : WEEK :

01

FEB 5

2.3. Presenting Information to different audiences by: i. Participating in a conversation and discussion ii. Writing recounts, descriptive essays, directions, instructions, stories, etc with correct fomat and structure iii. Giving directions, instructions and narrating or recount orally the events iv. Composing, revising, editing to correcting punctuation, spelling, etc v. Applying process writing skills vi. Writing simple essay with correct format, sentence structure and grammatically correct vii. Expanding notes or summarizing notes and texts

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to recall and apply what they had learnt during the past lessons in their writing i write short, simple essay individually ii TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Handout (notes)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T revises all that the students had learnt throughout the week ii. T tells students what they will do in this lesson

PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T revises what students had learnt in previous lesson I T shows the model essay again and quickly points out the items taught earlier I T shows on the blackboard how to start the essay using the appropriate sentence structure practices with the students writing the sentence structure as used in introduction, body & closing I T gives the actual PMR Question related to the genre taught and tells what they will do I T Students write their essay individually or may discuss with the friend next to them I T walks around and monitors or helps the students with problems allows students to complete the writing at home (Homework) if they can't finish it reminds the students to hand-in their essay in the next lesson. CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME DAY : DATE : FRIDAY

TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

TUESDAY 2013

cture

his lesson.

1.1. Make friends and keep relationships by b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information (iii). Responding appropriately to questions by stating, refuting and giving details L2. (vi). Participating in T-guide discussions on topic of interest by agreeing or disagreeing to opinions L3. (x). Reading newspaper articles, etc and discussing points of interest with friends 1.2. Take part in social interaction by b. Participating in conversations and discussions ; L2. (vi) Participating in a conversation by agreeing or disagreeing politely with other 2.3. Presenting Information to different audience by; a. Writing directions, instructions, recounts, announcements using appropriate formats and conventions L2. (xvii). Writing recounts, ect (xviii). Writing descriptions, etc (xix) Punctuating meaningfully using capital letters, commas, full stops, question marks L3: (xix) Writing a simple report complete with tables and/or pie-charts. b. Giving instructions, describing, narrating orally; L1: (xiv) Recounting orally what events took place c. Composing, revising and editing drafts, and checking accuracy of spelling, punctuation and grammar L1: (xvi) taking spelling and dictation of seen texts L2: (xix) Punctuating meaningfully using appropriate punctuations L3: (xx) Applying process writing skills by a. Discussing topic with teacher and peers and jotting down ideas b. Writing out an outline c. Writing paragraphs with a clear focus d. Revising and editing the draft until it is clear and flow well e. Proof-reading the draft to eliminate mistakes f. Writing the final draft of the text

WEDNESDAY 2013

cture

s in details

essay. s

THURSDAY 2013

cture

ure y & closing arlier

gives tasks to the students: Task 1: State the format/layout & Task 2: Identify the language items checks and does correction with students (If time premitted)

FRIDAY

2013

cture

ure y & closing

FRIDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

g or disagreeing to opinions

te formats and conventions

punctuation and grammar

dentify the language items

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes TUESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEDNESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE :

THURSDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME DAY : DATE : FRIDAY

TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

40 Minutes

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes TUESDAY

THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes WEDNESDAY

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THURSDAY

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes FRIDAY

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : TUESDAY

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEDNESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : THURSDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : FRIDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : TUESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEDNESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : THURSDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : FRIDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : TUESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES

SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING ( 3 - 5 MINUTES) (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

TUESDAY 2013

WEDNESDAY 2013

THURSDAY 2013

FRIDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

WEDNESDAY 2013

THURSDAY 2013

FRIDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

WEDNESDAY 2013

THURSDAY 2013

FRIDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

WEDNESDAY 2013

THURSDAY 2013

FRIDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : MONDAY 02 SEPT

40 Minutes

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE : WEEK :

WEDNESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME DAY : DATE : FRIDAY

TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

40 Minutes

WEEK :

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : WEEK : MONDAY

40 Minutes

40 Minutes

40 Minutes

THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY

40 Minutes

40 Minutes

40 Minutes

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : WEEK : WEDNESDAY

40 Minutes

40 Minutes

40 Minutes

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : WEEK : FRIDAY

40 Minutes

40 Minutes

40 Minutes

Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : MONDAY

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES

SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

WEDNESDAY 2013

FRIDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

WEDNESDAY 2013

FRIDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 2 ARIF TIME 1045 - 1205 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes People THEME Chapter 3: Famous Faces TOPIC Talking about famous people in Malaysia/world SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY 19 FEB 8

a. Introducing oneself L1.(i). Talking about (describing) ones hobbies, pastimes, routines, ambitions and hopes, etc. L3. (viii) Writing a short letter to friend about ones hopes and ambitions, etc. b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. L1. (ii). Asking questions politely to get information c. Talking about self, family and friends, interests, etc, and understand when others talk about themselves L2. (viii). Writing a short letter to a friend about ones hopes, interests, ambitions, etc L2.(v) Writing simple messages to friends and family members relating to the above functions

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i talk about the famous people found in the text book and other famous people that they like/know ii identify main ideas/details and jot down important details from the text heard iii answer all the questions from the listening text correctly and talk on their answers TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Text book (pg1-3), work sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes the topic or shows pictures or reads articles related to the topic to be taught. ii. T asks questions to gauge students' background knowlegde and refresh students' memories. iii T introduces the objectives and tells what the students will do and learn in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T writes the topic, explains what's all about and talks orally on the topic. ii. T introduces the vocabularies and new words related to the topic, iii T gets some students to talk orally on the topic taught while teacher monitors and joins in. iv T distributes work sheets * (PBS Evidence) and tells what they are going to do in this activitiy. v. T reads the text for the first time and reminds students to listen carefully and answer the task. vi. T reads text for second time and tells students to check to make sure the got ann the answers. vii.T reads the text again and tells the students to do other tasks while listening. viii.T checks and discusses the answer to all the tasks with the students ix. T reminds the students to do their correction CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T gives sample questions (asked in examination) related to the topic and tells students to do as homework ii. T summaries what the students had learnt and gives comment on their performance in the activities iii T tells the students what they will learn or do in the next lesson. REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS 2 ARIF TIME 0905 - 1025 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes People THEME Chapter 3: Famous Faces TOPIC Reading Comprehension (Famous People) SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
2.1. Obtain ibformation for different purposes by i. Listening to and understanding a variety of texts of suitable length ii. Reading materials such as articles silently and aloud with understanding 2.2. Process information by i. Scanning and Skimming for specific information (details) and ideas ii. Extracting main ideas and supporting details iii. Following sequence of ideas, predicting outcomes iv. Getting meaning of unfamiliar words based on context and using dictionary.

DAY : DATE : WEEK :

22

FRIDAY FEB 8

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i skim and scan for important details or main is ideas from the text read ii identify importain details used to answer the questions given iii answer at least 80% of the questions given correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Work sheet, text book

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T briefly explains important skills used to answer comprehension questions such as looking for main ideas, supporting details, guess meaning based on context and so on that they learnt before ii. T gives example for the students to see and follow iii T introduces objectives of the lesson and tells what they are going to do in this lesson. PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T gives reading passage and does the exercise with the students as model for them to follow. I T gives another sets of Examination like questions and tells what they will do I T Students answer the questions given within time given I T walks around and gives help to needy students I T checks and discusses the questions with the students by asking students to give their answer and I T reason for their choice of answer I T explains why the option given is correct or wrong and reminds students to apply in real examnation I T reminds students to do correction I T gives Homework :( Expansion exercise) and reminds them to hand-in the following day CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T summaries what the students had learnt and gives comment on their performance in the activities I T reminds students to remember what they had learnt in this lesson. I T tells the students what they will learn or do in the next lesson. REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS 2 ARIF TIME 1045 - 1205 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes People THEME Chapter 3: Famous Faces TOPIC Grammar : Adjectives (Descriptive) SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
2.2. Process Information by: i. Skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas ii. Noting important details iii. Scanning for details iv. Identify correct mistakes/ideas for the texts v. Guessing for meaning based on context or using dictionary

DAY : DATE : WEEK :

TUESDAY 25 FEB 9

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i recall what they had learnt in previous lesson and apply them in writing and exercises ii to use the language items taught orally and in written exercises iii answer at least 90% of the questions given correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
handout, work sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T ii. T iii T iv T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T tells the students to refer to textbook (Simple Present Tense :pg8) and read the notes given I T gives extra note and explains to the students I T gives examples on how to use in oral and written language I T shows example on types of questions asked in examination I T tells the students to copy the notes for future reference I T tells the students to complete the exercises given I T discusses and checks by telling why the option chosen is right or wrong I T reminds the students to do their correction I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME 2 ARIF 0905 - 1025 DAY : DATE : 01 FRIDAY MAC

TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes People THEME Chapter 3: Famous Faces TOPIC Grammar: Simple Past Tense SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
2.2. Process Information by: i. Skimming and scanning for specific information and ideas ii. Noting important details iii. Scanning for details iv. Identify correct mistakes/ideas for the texts v. Guessing for meaning based on context or using dictionary

WEEK :

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i understand and know the formation and uses of simple past tense ii apply what they had learnt in written exercises or orally iii answer all the questions given correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T writes the language item taught in this particular lesson ( Wh-Words - pg 9 ) I T tells the students to refer to textbook (pg 9 ) and read the notes given carefully I T gives more notes and details and explains in depth plus ample examples I T asks some students to lists down any language item taught that they know while teacher write I T on the blackboard I T explains to the students and gives more examples I T tells the students to copy notes into their exercise book for future use I T gives exercise and tells what / how to complete the task I T checks and discusses the exercise with the students CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 2 ARIF 1045 - 1205 40 Minutes DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY 04 MAC 10

People THEME Literature: Poem TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : WEEK : FRIDAY

40 Minutes People

40 Minutes

40 Minutes

Literature : Poem TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY

40 Minutes

40 Minutes

40 Minutes

writing

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. (iii). Responding appropriately to questions by stating, refuting and giving details L2. (vi). Participating in T-guide discussions on topic of interest by agreeing or disagreeing to opinions 2.3. Presenting Information to different audience by; a. Writing directions, instructions, recounts, announcements using appropriate formats and conventions (xviii). Writing descriptions, etc c. Composing, revising and editing drafts, and checking accuracy of spelling, punctuation and grammar L2: (xix) Punctuating meaningfully using appropriate punctuations

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T ii. T iii T iv T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T introduces the genre or essay type that students will learn in this particular lesson ii. T introduces and explains in detail the details related to the genre taught iii T shows important aspects related to writing essay that students should know iv T explains the aspects plus examples v. T shows sample essay and brieftly explains the aspects taught earlier such as the format, paragraphing, punctuation and others vi. T tells students to copy the notes for future use

I I I

CLOSING T T T REFLECTION:

(5 - 7 Minutes)

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : WEEK : FRIDAY

40 Minutes

40 Minutes

40 Minutes

writing

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:


b. Taking part in conversations and discussions. (iii). Responding appropriately to questions by stating, refuting and giving details L2. (vi). Participating in T-guide discussions on topic of interest by agreeing or disagreeing to opinions 2.3. Presenting Information to different audience by; a. Writing directions, instructions, recounts, announcements using appropriate formats and conventions (xviii). Writing descriptions, etc c. Composing, revising and editing drafts, and checking accuracy of spelling, punctuation and grammar L2: (xix) Punctuating meaningfully using appropriate punctuations

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T ii. T iii T iv T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T introduces tips or strategies to answer the particular genre ii. T explains in detail and gives examples iii T introduces, shows and explains the sentence structure of the particular genre or essay. iv T shows model essay and points out the sentence structure taught earlier v. T gives time for the students to copy note vi. T gives exercise: Forming Sentences and Grammar Exercise vii.T checks and discusses the tasks with the students

I I I

CLOSING T T T REFLECTION:

(5 - 7 Minutes)

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
b. Taking part in conversations and discussions.

DAY : DATE : WEEK :

TUESDAY

(iii). Responding appropriately to questions by stating, refuting and giving details L2. (vi). Participating in T-guide discussions on topic of interest by agreeing or disagreeing to opinions 2.3. Presenting Information to different audience by; a. Writing directions, instructions, recounts, announcements using appropriate formats and conventions (xviii). Writing descriptions, etc c. Composing, revising and editing drafts, and checking accuracy of spelling, punctuation and grammar L2: (xix) Punctuating meaningfully using appropriate punctuations

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T ii. T iii T iv T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T introduces language items used in writing the essay of this genre and explains ii. T shows model essay and points out the language items taught iii T gives another model essay and explains it iv T tells the students to points out the structure, sentence patterns and language items taught earlier in this lesson. v. T shows how to start the writing and explains in details vi. T tells the students to write their draft vii.T Homework: Write essay individually CLOSING I T I T I T REFLECTION: (5 - 7 Minutes)

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : FRIDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : FRIDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : FRIDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : FRIDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES

SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : FRIDAY

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes)

vi T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

TUESDAY 2013

ves

y like/know

ries.

in. vitiy. e task. swers.

mework ties

FRIDAY 2013

skimming and scanning for specific information and stating what the text is about extracting main ideas and supporting details read or listened identifying main ideas and supporting details from the text read list down sequence of events found in the text predicting outcomes from the text read drawing conclusion from the text read Getting meaning of unfamiliar words based on context and using dictionary anser all the questions correctly

ing for arnt before

llow.

ties

TUESDAY 2013

given

FRIDAY 2013

her write

TUESDAY 2013

FRIDAY 2013

mt1

TUESDAY 2013

ns

FRIDAY 2013

ns

TUESDAY 2013

ns

ught

FRIDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

FRIDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

FRIDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

FRIDAY 2013

TUESDAY 2013

FRIDAY 2013

he text is about

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI TIME 0825 - 0905 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Poem - A Fighter's Lines TOPIC Introduction to literary terms SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY 05 FEB 6

31. Listen to, read, view and respond to literary works by; a. Understanding and telling in one's own words the story/poem heard or read and giving one's opinion L1. (iii). Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. L1. (ii) Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary b. Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting c. Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. L3. (xi) Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story L1. (i) Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i recognizing the elements in studying poem such as stanza, lines, theme, etc ii retelling what the poem is about using their own words iii complete the task given successfully TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Workbook, Work Sheets, Notes

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks oral questions to gauge students' knowledge on poem ii. T asks some students to talk about what they know on literary terms used in poem iii T introduces the objective(s) of the lesson and tells what they are going to do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T explains the meaning of literary term in studying literature component (Poem & Short Story) ii. T writes the literary terms usually used in studying poem on the blackboard iii T explains the meaning of the literary terms shown and gives examples iv T introduces the poem that the students will learn in this lesson and asks questions based on title v. T asks students to tell on what they understand based on the title of the poem "I Wonder" vi. T recites the poem with the students using correct intonation and style vii.T introduces the vocabularies used in the poem and explains the meaning viii.T tells the students to copy notes for future use ix. T Homework: Answer questions (Exam. Format) CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught ii. T summarizes the lesson. iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS 3 DEDIKASI TIME 1045 - 1125 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Poem - A Fighter's Lines TOPIC Synopisi (Literal & Literary) SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : WEDNESDAY 06 FEB 6

31. Listen to, read, view and respond to literary works by; a. Understanding and telling in one's own words the story/poem heard or read and giving one's opinion L1. (iii). Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. L1. (ii) Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary b. Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting c. Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. L3. (xi) Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story L1. (i) Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i retelling the content of the poem studied using their own words ii finding the meaning of the unfamiliar words using contextual clues and dictionary iii answer all the questions given correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Literature Textbook, Work Sheet, Printed Notes

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T checks and discusses students' homework and tells them to do their correction ii. T revises what they had learnt in the previous lesson iii T introduces objectives of the lesson and tells what students will do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T does a mind-map on the synopsis of the poem on the blackboard ii. T explains what the poem is about literally and literaryly iii T asks some students to talk on what they think of the poem in their own words iv T shows samples questions usually asked in examination related to synopsis of the poem v. T tells students to copy the notes into their exercise book. vi. T introduces the stting of the poem and explains in details vii.T shows samples questions usually asked in examination related to setting of the poem viii.T gives exercise to the students and tells what to do with the task ix. T checks and discusses the answer CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding ii. T summarizes the lesson. iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS 3 DEDIKASI TIME 0745 - 0825 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes People THEME Poem - A Fighter's Lines TOPIC Theme, Values, Messages SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE : WEEK :

THURSDAY 07 FEB 6

31. Listen to, read, view and respond to literary works by; a. Understanding and telling in one's own words the story/poem heard or read and giving one's opinion L1. (iii). Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. L1. (ii) Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary b. Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting c. Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. L3. (xi) Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story L1. (i) Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i recognizing the elements in the poem such as themes, values and messages learnt. ii talk about the themes, values and messages found in the poem and write short decription iii complete exercise given successfully without teacher's help TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Printed Note, work sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T revises what the students had learnt in the previous lessons by asking oral questions ii. T introduces the objectives of the lesson iii T tells what the students will do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T writes the theme(s) of the poem studied ii. T explains the theme(s) in detsil plus examples of real lfe situations iii T shows sample questions related to themes in examination iv T introduces the values and messages that one could learn from the poem v. T explains the values/ messages and relate them to real life experiences vi. T shows and explains sample questions related to values and messages taught. vii.T gives exercises to the students related to the devices taught viii.T checks and discusses the exercises with the students (If time premitted) or complete as homework CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught ii. T summarizes the lesson. iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 DEDIKASI DAY : FRIDAY

TIME 1045 - 1205 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes People THEME Poem - A Fighter's Lines TOPIC Tone & Mood SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DATE : WEEK :

08

FEB 6

31. Listen to, read, view and respond to literary works by; a. Understanding and telling in one's own words the story/poem heard or read and giving one's opinion L1. (iii). Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. L1. (ii) Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary b. Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting c. Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. L3. (xi) Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story L1. (i) Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i talk about devices used in the poem such as tone and mood ii list down the tone and mood and show evidence from the poem. iii answer at least 50% of the questions given correctly. TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Notes, work sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T revises what the students had learnt in previous lesson iv T checks and discusses the homework given in the previous lesson vi T introduces the objectives and tells what the students will do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T writes the tones used in the poem studied ii. T explains them in detail plus examples of real lfe situations iii T shows sample questions related to tones in examination iv T introduces the mood of the poem used by the poet v. T explains them by showing the evidence from the poem vi. T shows and explains sample questions related to values and messages taught. vi. T gives exercises (PMR Oriented Questions) and tells the students to complete within 30 minutes vii.T checks and discusses the exercises with the students viii.T Gives Homewrok: More Exercise CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

40 Minutes

31. Listen to, read, view and respond to literary works by; a. Understanding and telling in one's own words the story/poem heard or read and giving one's opinion L1. (iii). Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. L1. (ii) Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary b. Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting c. Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. L3. (xi) Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story L1. (i) Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T asks oral questions to gauge students' knowledge on poem iv T asks some students to talk about what they know on literary terms used in poem vi T introduces the objective(s) of the lesson and tells what they are going to do in this lesson ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T explains the meaning of literary term in studying literature component (Short Story) I T writes the literary terms usually used in studying poem on the blackboard I T explains the meaning of the literary terms shown and gives examples I T introduces the title of short story studied and asks questions based on title of the story I T asks students to tell on what they understand based on the title of the story I T introduces the author of the story and discusses with the studend I T shows sample questions usually asked based on author and title of the story I T tells the students to copy notes for future use I T Homework: Answer questions (Exam. Format) CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T gives all important points taught in the lesson ii. T summarizes the lesson. iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

THEME TOPIC Short story - Introduction ( Literary terms) SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

TOPIC Short Story - synopsis of the story & setting SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Short Story - Characters & Characteristics SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Short Story - Plots / Events

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Short Story - Themes & Messages

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

TUESDAY 2013

on

rhythm

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

on

Story)

d on title r"

WEDNESDAY 2013

on

rhythm

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

THURSDAY 2013

on

rhythm

on

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

s homework

FRIDAY

2013

on

rhythm

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

minutes

MONDAY 2013

on

rhythm

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

on

MONDAY 2013

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 ELIT TIME 1205 - 1245 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Poem - A Fighter's Lines TOPIC Introduction to literary terms SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : MONDAY 04 FEB 6

31. Listen to, read, view and respond to literary works by; a. Understanding and telling in one's own words the story/poem heard or read and giving one's opinion L1. (iii). Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. L1. (ii) Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary b. Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting c. Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. L3. (xi) Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story L1. (i) Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i recognizing the elements in studying poem such as stanza, lines, theme, etc ii retelling what the poem is about using their own words iii complete the task given successfully TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Workbook, Work Sheets, Notes

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks oral questions to gauge students' knowledge on poem ii. T asks some students to talk about what they know on literary terms used in poem iii T introduces the objective(s) of the lesson and tells what they are going to do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T explains the meaning of literary term in studying literature component (Poem & Short Story) ii. T writes the literary terms usually used in studying poem on the blackboard iii T explains the meaning of the literary terms shown and gives examples iv T introduces the poem that the students will learn in this lesson and asks questions based on title v. T asks students to tell on what they understand based on the title of the poem "I Wonder" vi. T recites the poem with the students using correct intonation and style vii.T introduces the vocabularies used in the poem and explains the meaning viii.T tells the students to copy notes for future use ix. T Homework: Answer questions (Exam. Format) CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught ii. T summarizes the lesson. iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS 3 ELIT TIME 1245 - 1325 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Poem - A Fighter's Lines TOPIC Synopisi (Literal & Literary) SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY 05 FEB 6

31. Listen to, read, view and respond to literary works by; a. Understanding and telling in one's own words the story/poem heard or read and giving one's opinion L1. (iii). Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. L1. (ii) Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary b. Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting c. Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. L3. (xi) Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story L1. (i) Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i retelling the content of the poem studied using their own words ii finding the meaning of the unfamiliar words using contextual clues and dictionary iii answer all the questions given correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Literature Textbook, Work Sheet, Printed Notes

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T checks and discusses students' homework and tells them to do their correction ii. T revises what they had learnt in the previous lesson iii T introduces objectives of the lesson and tells what students will do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T does a mind-map on the synopsis of the poem on the blackboard ii. T explains what the poem is about literally and literaryly iii T asks some students to talk on what they think of the poem in their own words iv T shows samples questions usually asked in examination related to synopsis of the poem v. T tells students to copy the notes into their exercise book. vi. T introduces the stting of the poem and explains in details vii.T shows samples questions usually asked in examination related to setting of the poem viii.T gives exercise to the students and tells what to do with the task ix. T checks and discusses the answer CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding ii. T summarizes the lesson. iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS 3 ELIT TIME 1045 - 1205 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes People THEME Poem - A Fighter's Lines TOPIC Theme, Values, Messages SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE : WEEK :

WEDNESDAY 06 FEB 6

31. Listen to, read, view and respond to literary works by; a. Understanding and telling in one's own words the story/poem heard or read and giving one's opinion L1. (iii). Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. L1. (ii) Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary b. Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting c. Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. L3. (xi) Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story L1. (i) Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i recognizing the elements in the poem such as themes, values and messages learnt. ii talk about the themes, values and messages found in the poem and write short decription iii complete exercise given successfully without teacher's help TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Printed Note, work sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T revises what the students had learnt in the previous lessons by asking oral questions ii. T introduces the objectives of the lesson iii T tells what the students will do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T writes the theme(s) of the poem studied ii. T explains the theme(s) in detsil plus examples of real lfe situations iii T shows sample questions related to themes in examination iv T introduces the values and messages that one could learn from the poem v. T explains the values/ messages and relate them to real life experiences vi. T shows and explains sample questions related to values and messages taught. vii.T gives exercises to the students related to the devices taught viii.T checks and discusses the exercises with the students ix. T Gives Homewrok: More Exercise CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught ii. T summarizes the lesson. iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 ELIT DAY : FRIDAY

TIME 0705 - 0745 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes People THEME Poem - A Fighter's Lines TOPIC Tone & Mood SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DATE : WEEK :

08

FEB 6

31. Listen to, read, view and respond to literary works by; a. Understanding and telling in one's own words the story/poem heard or read and giving one's opinion L1. (iii). Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. L1. (ii) Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary b. Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting c. Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. L3. (xi) Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story L1. (i) Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i talk about devices used in the poem such as tone and mood ii list down the tone and mood and show evidence from the poem. iii answer at least 50% of the questions given correctly. TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Notes, work sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T revises what the students had learnt in previous lesson iv T checks and discusses the homework given in the previous lesson vi T introduces the objectives and tells what the students will do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T writes the tones used in the poem studied ii. T explains them in detail plus examples of real lfe situations iii T shows sample questions related to tones in examination iv T introduces the mood of the poem used by the poet v. T explains them by showing the evidence from the poem vi. T shows and explains sample questions related to values and messages taught. vi. T gives exercises to the students related to the devices taught vii.T checks and discusses the exercises with the students viii.T Gives Homewrok: More Exercise CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

40 Minutes

31. Listen to, read, view and respond to literary works by; a. Understanding and telling in one's own words the story/poem heard or read and giving one's opinion L1. (iii). Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. L1. (ii) Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary b. Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting c. Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. L3. (xi) Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story L1. (i) Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T asks oral questions to gauge students' knowledge on poem iv T asks some students to talk about what they know on literary terms used in poem vi T introduces the objective(s) of the lesson and tells what they are going to do in this lesson ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T explains the meaning of literary term in studying literature component (Short Story) I T writes the literary terms usually used in studying poem on the blackboard I T explains the meaning of the literary terms shown and gives examples I T introduces the title of short story studied and asks questions based on title of the story I T asks students to tell on what they understand based on the title of the story I T introduces the author of the story and discusses with the studend I T shows sample questions usually asked based on author and title of the story I T tells the students to copy notes for future use I T Homework: Answer questions (Exam. Format) CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T gives all important points taught in the lesson ii. T summarizes the lesson. iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

THEME TOPIC Short story - Introduction ( Literary terms) SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

TOPIC Short Story - synopsis of the story & setting SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Short Story - Characters & Characteristics SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Short Story - Plots / Events

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Short Story - Themes & Messages

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

on

rhythm

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

on

Story)

d on title r"

TUESDAY 2013

on

rhythm

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

WEDNESDAY 2013

on

rhythm

on

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

FRIDAY

2013

on

rhythm

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

MONDAY 2013

on

rhythm

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

on

MONDAY 2013

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 2 ARIF TIME 1245 - 1325 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Poem - I Wonder TOPIC Introduction to literary terms SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : MONDAY 04 FEB 6

31. Listen to, read, view and respond to literary works by; a. Understanding and telling in one's own words the story/poem heard or read and giving one's opinion L1. (iii). Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. L1. (ii) Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary b. Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting c. Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. L3. (xi) Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story L1. (i) Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i recognizing the elements in studying poem such as stanza, lines, theme, etc ii retelling what the poem is about using their own words iii complete the task given successfully TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Workbook, Work Sheets, Notes

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks oral questions to gauge students' knowledge on poem ii. T asks some students to talk about what they know on literary terms used in poem iii T introduces the objective(s) of the lesson and tells what they are going to do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T explains the meaning of literary term in studying literature component (Poem & Short Story) ii. T writes the literary terms usually used in studying poem on the blackboard iii T explains the meaning of the literary terms shown and gives examples iv T introduces the poem that the students will learn in this lesson and asks questions based on title v. T asks students to tell on what they understand based on the title of the poem "I Wonder" vi. T recites the poem with the students using correct intonation and style vii.T introduces the vocabularies used in the poem and explains the meaning viii.T tells the students to copy notes for future use ix. T Homework: Answer questions (Exam. Format) CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught ii. T summarizes the lesson. iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS 2 ARIF TIME 1045 - 1205 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes PEOPLE THEME Poem - I Wonder TOPIC Synopisi (Literal & Literary) SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : TUESDAY 05 FEB 6

31. Listen to, read, view and respond to literary works by; a. Understanding and telling in one's own words the story/poem heard or read and giving one's opinion L1. (iii). Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. L1. (ii) Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary b. Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting c. Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. L3. (xi) Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story L1. (i) Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i retelling the content of the poem studied using their own words ii finding the meaning of the unfamiliar words using contextual clues and dictionary iii answer all the questions given correctly TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Literature Textbook, Work Sheet, Printed Notes

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T checks and discusses students' homework and tells them to do their correction ii. T revises what they had learnt in the previous lesson iii T introduces objectives of the lesson and tells what students will do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T does a mind-map on the synopsis of the poem on the blackboard ii. T explains what the poem is about literally and literaryly iii T asks some students to talk on what they think of the poem in their own words iv T shows samples questions usually asked in examination related to synopsis of the poem v. T tells students to copy the notes into their exercise book. vi. T introduces the stting of the poem and explains in details vii.T shows samples questions usually asked in examination related to setting of the poem viii.T gives exercise to the students and tells what to do with the task ix. T checks and discusses the answer CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding ii. T summarizes the lesson. iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS 2 ARIF TIME 0905 - 1025 TIME DURATION: 80 Minutes People THEME Poem - I Wonder TOPIC Theme, Values, Messages SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE : WEEK :

08

FRIDAY FEB 6

31. Listen to, read, view and respond to literary works by; a. Understanding and telling in one's own words the story/poem heard or read and giving one's opinion L1. (iii). Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. L1. (ii) Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary b. Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting c. Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. L3. (xi) Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story L1. (i) Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i recognizing the elements in the poem such as themes, values and messages learnt. ii talk about the themes, values and messages found in the poem and write short decription iii complete exercise given successfully without teacher's help TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Printed Note, work sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T revises what the students had learnt in the previous lessons by asking oral questions ii. T introduces the objectives of the lesson iii T tells what the students will do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (70 Minutes) i. T writes the theme(s) of the poem studied ii. T explains the theme(s) in detsil plus examples of real lfe situations iii T shows sample questions related to themes in examination iv T introduces the values and messages that one could learn from the poem v. T explains the values/ messages and relate them to real life experiences vi. T shows and explains sample questions related to values and messages taught. vii.T gives exercises to the students related to the devices taught viii.T checks and discusses the exercises with the students CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T asks some students to talk about what they had learnt or the topic taught ii. T summarizes the lesson. iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS 3 ELIT DAY :

TIME 0705 - 0745 TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes People THEME Poem - I Wonder TOPIC Tone & Mood SUB-TOPIC SKILLS L&S/R/W LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DATE : WEEK :

31. Listen to, read, view and respond to literary works by; a. Understanding and telling in one's own words the story/poem heard or read and giving one's opinion L1. (iii). Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. L1. (ii) Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary b. Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting c. Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. L3. (xi) Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story L1. (i) Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to i talk about devices used in the poem such as tone and mood ii list down the tone and mood and show evidence from the poem. iii answer at least 50% of the questions given correctly. TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Notes, work sheet

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T revises what the students had learnt in previous lesson iv T checks and discusses the homework given in the previous lesson vi T introduces the objectives and tells what the students will do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (30 Minutes) i. T writes the tones used in the poem studied ii. T explains them in detail plus examples of real lfe situations iii T shows sample questions related to tones in examination iv T introduces the mood of the poem used by the poet v. T explains them by showing the evidence from the poem vi. T shows and explains sample questions related to values and messages taught. vi. T gives exercises to the students related to the devices taught vii.T checks and discusses the exercises with the students viii.T Gives Homewrok: More Exercise CLOSING (3 - 5 Minutes) i. T summarizes the lesson. ii. T asks reinforcement questions to gauge students' understanding iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME DAY : DATE : MONDAY

TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:
31. Listen to, read, view and respond to literary works by; a. Understanding and telling in one's own words the story/poem heard or read and giving one's opinion L1. (iii). Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. L1. (ii) Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary b. Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting c. Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. L3. (xi) Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story L1. (i) Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T asks oral questions to gauge students' knowledge on poem iv T asks some students to talk about what they know on literary terms used in poem vi T introduces the objective(s) of the lesson and tells what they are going to do in this lesson ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T explains the meaning of literary term in studying literature component (Short Story) I T writes the literary terms usually used in studying poem on the blackboard I T explains the meaning of the literary terms shown and gives examples I T introduces the title of short story studied and asks questions based on title of the story I T asks students to tell on what they understand based on the title of the story I T introduces the author of the story and discusses with the students I T shows sample questions usually asked based on author and title of the story I T tells the students to copy notes for future use I T Homework: Answer questions (Exam. Format) CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T gives all important points taught in the lesson ii. T summarizes the lesson. iii T reminds students on what they will do in the next or following lesson REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

THEME TOPIC Short story - Introduction ( Literary terms) SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

TOPIC Short Story - synopsis of the story & setting SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Short Story - Characters & Characteristics SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Short Story - Plots / Events

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Short Story - Themes & Messages

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

on

rhythm

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

on

Story)

d on title r"

TUESDAY 2013

on

rhythm

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

FRIDAY 2013

on

rhythm

on

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

2013

on

rhythm

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

MONDAY 2013

on

rhythm

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

on

MONDAY 2013

objectives Retelling the story or content of the poem in one's own words. Finding out the meaning of unfamiliar words by using contextual clues/dictionary Recognizing elements in a story such as characters and setting Giving sequence of events Talking about characters in a story and writing a simple paragraph on them. Talking about how events, characters and values similar to real life Understanding some figurative language in the text suitable to students' proficiency level Explaining the message the writer is trying to convey and discussing how this relates to one's life. Talking about values in a text. Talking about the theme and writing a simple paragraph about the theme of the story Understanding other people' culture, traditions, customs and beliefs Talking about the place and time the story/poem took place and writing simple paragraph Reciting poems with feeling and expressions. Reciting a poem with feeling & expression & with correct pronounciation, intonation, stress and rhythm saying what one thinks about the text and writing a paragraph or two

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

relates to one's life.

onation, stress and rhythm

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC Poem - Introduction to literary terms SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : MONDAY 6

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Workbook, Work Sheets, Notes

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T asks oral questions to gauge students' knowledge on poem ii. T asks some students to talk about what they know on literary terms used in poem iii T introduces the objective(s) of the lesson and tells what they are going to do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T explains the meaning of literary term in studying literature component (Poem & Short Story) ii. T writes the literary terms usually used in studying poem on the blackboard iii T explains the meaning of the literary terms shown and gives examples iv T introduces the poem that the students will learn in this lesson and asks questions based on title v. T asks students to tell on what they understand based on the title of the poem "I Wonder" vi. T recites the poem with the students using correct intonation and style vii.T introduces the vocabularies used in the poem and explains the meaning viii.T tells the students to copy notes for future use ix. T Homework: Answer questions (Exam. Format) CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T ii. T iii T REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013)

ENGLISH LANGUAGE
CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME Chapter 1 :Getting To Know You TOPIC Poem - Synopisi (Literal & Literary) SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS: DAY : DATE : WEEK : MONDAY 02 SEPT 6

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S)
Literature Textbook, Work Sheet, Printed Notes

TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T checks and discusses students' homework and tells them to do their correction ii. T revises what they had learnt in the previous lesson iii T introduces objectives of the lesson and tells what students will do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T does a mind-map on the synopsis of the poem on the blackboard ii. T explains what the poem is about literally and literaryly iii T asks some students to talk on what they think of the poem in their own words iv T shows samples questions usually asked in examination related to synopsis of the poem v. T tells students to copy the notes into their exercise book. vi. T introduces the stting of the poem and explains in details vii.T shows samples questions usually asked in examination related to setting of the poem viii.T gives exercise to the students and tells what to do with the task ix. T checks and discusses the answer CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE

CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC Poem - Theme, Values, Messages SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

DAY : DATE : WEEK :

MONDAY 02 SEPT 6

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T revises what the students had learnt in the previous lessons by asking oral questions ii. T introduces the objectives of the lesson iii T tells what the students will do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T writes the theme(s) of the poem studied ii. T explains the theme(s) in detsil plus examples of real lfe situations iii T shows sample questions related to themes in examination iv T introduces the values and messages that one could learn from the poem v. T explains the values/ messages and relate them to real life experiences vi. T shows and explains sample questions related to values and messages taught. vii.T gives exercises to the students related to the devices taught viii.T checks and discusses the exercises with the students ix. T Gives Homewrok: More Exercise CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) i. T ii. T iii T REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS DAY : MONDAY

TIME TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC Poem - Tone & Mood SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

40 Minutes

DATE : WEEK :

02

SEPT 6

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T revises what the students had learnt in previous lesson iv T checks and discusses the homework given in the previous lesson vi T introduces the objectives and tells what the students will do in this lesson PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T writes the tones used in the poem studied I T explains them in detsil plus examples of real lfe situations I T shows sample questions related to tones in examination I T introduces the mood of the poem used by the poet I T explains them by showing the evidence from the poem I T shows and explains sample questions related to values and messages taught. I T gives exercises to the students related to the devices taught I T checks and discusses the exercises with the students I T Gives Homewrok: More Exercise CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME DAY : DATE : MONDAY 02 SEPT

TIME DURATION: 40 Minutes 40 Minutes THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

40 Minutes

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T asks oral questions to gauge students' knowledge on poem iv T asks some students to talk about what they know on literary terms used in poem vi T introduces the objective(s) of the lesson and tells what they are going to do in this lesson ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T explains the meaning of literary term in studying literature component (Short Story) I T writes the literary terms usually used in studying poem on the blackboard I T explains the meaning of the literary terms shown and gives examples I T introduces the title of short story studied and asks questions based on title of the story I T asks students to tell on what they understand based on the title of the story I T introduces the author of the story and discusses with the studend I T shows sample questions usually asked based on author and title of the story I T tells the students to copy notes for future use I T Homework: Answer questions (Exam. Format) CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION:

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

THEME TOPIC Short story - Introduction ( Literary terms) SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

TOPIC Short Story - synopsis of the story & setting SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Short Story - Characters & Characteristics SUB-TOPIC SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 02 MONDAY SEPT

Short Story - Plots / Events

SKILLS LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

DAILY LESSON PLAN (2013) ENGLISH LANGUAGE


CLASS TIME TIME DURATION: THEME TOPIC SUB-TOPIC SKILLS DAY : DATE : 40 Minutes 40 Minutes 40 Minutes MONDAY 02 SEPT

Short Story - Themes & Messages

LEARNING OUTCOME(S) & SPECIFICATIONS:

LEARNING OBJECTIVE(S): By the end of the lesson, students should be able to

TEACHING MATERIAL(S) TEACHING STAGES SET -INDUCTION (5 - 7 Minutes) I T iv T vi T ii T PRESENTATION STAGES (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T I T CLOSING (5 - 7 Minutes) I T I T I T REFLECTION: Only a few in weak class involve in discussion and respond to questions

FOLLOW-UP ACTION(S)

MONDAY 2013

on

Story)

d on title r"

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY

2013

MONDAY 2013

on

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

MONDAY 2013

You might also like